TWI572201B - Universal access method and mobile device - Google Patents

Universal access method and mobile device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI572201B
TWI572201B TW102112343A TW102112343A TWI572201B TW I572201 B TWI572201 B TW I572201B TW 102112343 A TW102112343 A TW 102112343A TW 102112343 A TW102112343 A TW 102112343A TW I572201 B TWI572201 B TW I572201B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
information
access point
domain
user
secure access
Prior art date
Application number
TW102112343A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201351972A (en
Inventor
高在佑
魏泰煥
鄭熙遠
金賢英
文寶石
Original Assignee
三星電子股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 三星電子股份有限公司 filed Critical 三星電子股份有限公司
Publication of TW201351972A publication Critical patent/TW201351972A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI572201B publication Critical patent/TWI572201B/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/18Service support devices; Network management devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/06Authentication
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W12/00Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
    • H04W12/08Access security
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/18Processing of user or subscriber data, e.g. subscribed services, user preferences or user profiles; Transfer of user or subscriber data
    • H04W8/20Transfer of user or subscriber data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Telephonic Communication Services (AREA)

Description

通用存取方法及行動裝置 Universal access method and mobile device 【相關申請案之交叉參考】[Cross-Reference to Related Applications]

本申請案主張2012年4月8日在韓國智慧財產局申請的韓國專利申請案第10-2012-0036464號以及2013年1月15日在韓國智慧財產局申請的韓國專利申請案第10-2013-0004540號的優先權,此專利申請案的揭露內容的全文是以引用方式併入本文中。 This application claims Korean Patent Application No. 10-2012-0036464 filed on April 8, 2012 at the Korea Intellectual Property Office and Korean Patent Application No. 10-2013 filed at the Korea Intellectual Property Office on January 15, 2013. The priority of the disclosure of this patent application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein in its entirety.

根據本發明例示性實施例的設備及方法是關於一種管理伺服器及通用存取方法,且特別是一種關於用於控制網域裝置的管理伺服器及通用存取方法。 An apparatus and method according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention relates to a management server and a universal access method, and more particularly to a management server and a general access method for controlling a network domain device.

電信技術的進步已使家庭、汽車或辦公室中的裝置能夠經由一個網路而連接。 Advances in telecommunications technology have enabled devices in homes, cars or offices to be connected via a network.

舉例而言,家中使用的資訊電器(例如,個人電腦(personal computer;PC))經由有線/無線網路而連接,以實現存取網際網路、資料共用以及周邊裝置(例如,掃描儀及印表機) 的互動式控制。家庭網路可經由網際網路或攜帶型資訊終端而連結至外部網路,也因此對其他裝置(諸如,電視(television;TV)、冰箱、空調、數位多功能光碟(digital versatile disk;DVD)播放器以及數位相機)的遙控(remote control)是可能的。 For example, information appliances used in homes (for example, personal computers (PCs)) are connected via a wired/wireless network to enable access to the Internet, data sharing, and peripheral devices (eg, scanners and printers). Table machine) Interactive control. The home network can be connected to the external network via the Internet or a portable information terminal, and thus to other devices (such as television (TV), refrigerator, air conditioner, digital versatile disk (DVD)) The remote control of the player and the digital camera is possible.

隨著數位技術進步以及網際網路廣泛投入使用,家庭、汽車或辦公室中所安裝的裝置可經由一網路來連接。因此,日益需要開發容易對各網路系統中所包括的裝置執行環境設定的方法。 With the advancement of digital technology and the widespread use of the Internet, devices installed in homes, cars or offices can be connected via a network. Therefore, there is an increasing need to develop a method of easily performing environment setting for devices included in each network system.

本發明提出的例示性實施例克服上述缺點以及上文未描述的其他缺點。此外,所述例示性實施例並非為克服上述缺點所需,且例示性實施例可能不克服上述問題中的任一者。 The illustrative embodiments set forth herein overcome the above disadvantages and other disadvantages not described above. Moreover, the illustrative embodiments are not required to overcome the disadvantages described above, and the illustrative embodiments may not overcome any of the problems described.

本發明提供一種通用存取方法,所述方法由行動裝置執行,所述行動裝置儲存對應於第一網域的第一鑑別資訊以及對應於第二網域的第二鑑別資訊,所述方法包括:經由近場通訊(Near field communication;NFC)而自安全存取點接收向所述行動裝置請求鑑別資訊的訊號;選擇對應於所述安全存取點的所述第一鑑別資訊以及所述第二鑑別資訊中的一者;以及經由NFC而將所述所選擇的鑑別資訊傳送至所述安全存取點。 The present invention provides a universal access method, the method being performed by a mobile device, the mobile device storing first authentication information corresponding to a first domain and second authentication information corresponding to a second domain, the method comprising Receiving, by a near field communication (NFC), a signal requesting authentication information from the mobile device from a secure access point; selecting the first authentication information corresponding to the secure access point and the first One of the two authentication information; and transmitting the selected authentication information to the secure access point via NFC.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的安全存取點可包括與包含第一多個受控制裝置的第一網域相關聯的第一安全存取點以及 與包含第二多個受控制裝置的第二網域相關聯的第二安全存取點中的一者,且所述選擇可包括:判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點或與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點;以及若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一鑑別資訊;以及若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二鑑別資訊。 In an embodiment of the invention, the secure access point may include a first secure access point associated with the first domain including the first plurality of controlled devices and One of a second secure access point associated with a second domain comprising the second plurality of controlled devices, and the selecting can include determining that the secure access point corresponds to the first network The first secure access point associated with the domain or the second secure access point associated with the second domain; and if the secure access point is determined to correspond to the first domain Associated with the first secure access point, selecting the first authentication information; and determining that the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain And selecting the second authentication information.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的通用存取方法可更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一多個受控制裝置的第一裝置設定資訊;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二多個受控制裝置的第二裝置設定資訊;以及顯示圖形使用者介面,若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第一裝置設定資訊而控制所述第一多個受控制裝置,且若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第二裝置設定資訊而控制所述第二多個受控制裝置。 In an embodiment of the invention, the universal access method may further include: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, Determining first device setting information of the first plurality of controlled devices; and selecting the second if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain a second device setting information of the plurality of controlled devices; and displaying a graphical user interface, if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain a graphical user interface for controlling the first plurality of controlled devices based on the first device setting information, and if the secure access point corresponds to the second associated with the second domain And a secure access point, wherein the graphical user interface is configured to control the second plurality of controlled devices based on the second device setting information.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的第一裝置設定資訊可包括所述第一多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第一組態,且所述第二裝置設定資訊包括所述第二多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第二組態。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the first device setting information may include a first configuration of operation settings of the first plurality of controlled devices, and the second device setting information includes the second plurality A second configuration of the operational settings of the controlled device.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的通用存取方法可更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則控制所述第一多個受控制裝置;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則控制所述第二多個受控制裝置。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the universal access method may further include: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, Determining the first plurality of controlled devices; and controlling the second plurality of controlled devices if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second network domain.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的通用存取方法可更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則接收所述第一多個受控制裝置的操作設定的經更新的組態的經更新的第一裝置設定資訊;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則接收所述第二多個受控制裝置的操作設定的經更新的組態的經更新的第二裝置設定資訊;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則更新所述第一裝置設定資訊;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則更新所述第二裝置設定資訊。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the universal access method may further include: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, An updated configured updated first device setting information of an operational setting of the first plurality of controlled devices; and if the secure access point corresponds to the first associated with the second domain a second secure access point, receiving updated configuration updated second device setting information of an operational setting of said second plurality of controlled devices; and if said secure access point corresponds to said Updating the first device setting information by the first secure access point associated with a network domain; and if the secure access point corresponds to the second security associated with the second network domain The access point updates the second device setting information.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的第一鑑別資訊可包括與所述第一網域相關聯的第一安全金鑰,且所述第二鑑別資訊可包括與所述第二網域相關聯的第二安全金鑰。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the first authentication information may include a first security key associated with the first network domain, and the second authentication information may include a second network domain. The second security key of the association.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的第一鑑別資訊可包括與所述第一網域相關聯的第一使用者識別碼,且所述第二鑑別資訊可包括與所述第二網域相關聯的第二使用者識別碼。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the first authentication information may include a first user identifier associated with the first domain, and the second authentication information may include the second domain The associated second user ID.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的第一網域可位於第一位 置處,且所述第二網域可位於第二位置處。 In an embodiment of the invention, the first domain may be located in the first place. Placed, and the second domain can be located at the second location.

在本發明的一實施例中,上述的第一網域可為包括所述第一多個受控制裝置的第一網路,且所述第二網域可為包括所述第二多個受控制裝置的第二網路。 In an embodiment of the present invention, the first network domain may be a first network including the first plurality of controlled devices, and the second network domain may include the second plurality of The second network of control devices.

本發明提供一種行動裝置,包括:記憶體,其儲存對應於第一網域的第一鑑別資訊以及對應於第二網域的第二鑑別資訊;通訊單元,其經由近場通訊(NFC)而自安全存取點接收向所述行動裝置請求鑑別資訊的訊號;以及處理器,其選擇對應於所述安全存取點的所述第一鑑別資訊以及所述第二鑑別資訊中的一者,且控制所述通訊單元經由NFC而將所述所選擇的鑑別資訊傳送至所述安全存取點。 The present invention provides a mobile device, comprising: a memory that stores first authentication information corresponding to a first domain and second authentication information corresponding to a second domain; and a communication unit that is via Near Field Communication (NFC) Receiving, from the secure access point, a signal requesting authentication information from the mobile device; and a processor selecting one of the first authentication information and the second authentication information corresponding to the secure access point, And controlling the communication unit to transmit the selected authentication information to the secure access point via NFC.

本發明提供一種伺服器,包括:記憶體,其儲存(i)與第一網域相關聯的第一鑑別資訊及所述第一網域中的第一受控制裝置的第一裝置設定資訊以及(ii)與第二網域相關聯的第二鑑別資訊及所述第二網域中的第二受控制裝置的第二裝置設定資訊;通訊單元,其自行動裝置接收包括鑑別資料的鑑別請求;以及控制器,經組態以藉由將所述所接收的鑑別資料與所述第一鑑別資訊以及所述第二鑑別資訊進行比較,而回應於所述鑑別請求來鑑別使用者,且將所述鑑別的結果傳輸至所述行動裝置,以使得若所述鑑別資料對應於所述第一鑑別資訊,則所述行動裝置可基於所述第一裝置設定資訊來控制所述第一受控制裝置,且若所述鑑別資料對應於所述第二鑑別資訊,則所述行動裝置可基於所述第 二裝置設定資訊來控制所述第二受控制裝置。 The present invention provides a server, comprising: a memory storing (i) first authentication information associated with a first domain and first device setting information of a first controlled device in the first domain and (ii) second authentication information associated with the second network domain and second device setting information of the second controlled device in the second network domain; the communication unit receiving the authentication request including the authentication material from the mobile device And a controller configured to authenticate the user in response to the authentication request by comparing the received authentication data with the first authentication information and the second authentication information, and Transmitting the result of the authentication to the mobile device, such that if the authentication data corresponds to the first authentication information, the mobile device may control the first controlled based on the first device setting information And if the authentication data corresponds to the second authentication information, the mobile device may be based on the The second device setting information controls the second controlled device.

本發明的另外及其他態樣及優點將闡述於下文的描述中,且將自所述描述顯而易見。 Additional and other aspects and advantages of the invention will be set forth in the description which follows.

100‧‧‧管理伺服器 100‧‧‧Management Server

110‧‧‧通訊單元 110‧‧‧Communication unit

120‧‧‧儲存單元 120‧‧‧ storage unit

130‧‧‧控制單元 130‧‧‧Control unit

200‧‧‧使用者終端設備 200‧‧‧User terminal equipment

210‧‧‧通訊單元 210‧‧‧Communication unit

220‧‧‧儲存單元 220‧‧‧ storage unit

230‧‧‧控制單元 230‧‧‧Control unit

231‧‧‧使用者資訊管理單元 231‧‧‧User Information Management Unit

300-1‧‧‧鎖定設備 300-1‧‧‧Locking equipment

300-2...300-n‧‧‧裝置 300-2...300-n‧‧‧ device

400‧‧‧雲端伺服器 400‧‧‧Cloud Server

500‧‧‧外部伺服器 500‧‧‧External Server

510‧‧‧顯示單元 510‧‧‧Display unit

520‧‧‧感測器單元 520‧‧‧Sensor unit

521‧‧‧觸摸感測器 521‧‧‧Touch sensor

522‧‧‧地磁感測器 522‧‧‧Geomagnetic sensor

523‧‧‧加速度感測器 523‧‧‧Acceleration sensor

524‧‧‧彎曲感測器 524‧‧‧Bend sensor

525‧‧‧壓力感測器 525‧‧‧pressure sensor

526‧‧‧距離感測器 526‧‧‧ Distance sensor

527‧‧‧握持感測器 527‧‧‧ Holding sensor

530‧‧‧控制單元 530‧‧‧Control unit

540‧‧‧儲存單元 540‧‧‧ storage unit

550‧‧‧通訊單元 550‧‧‧Communication unit

551‧‧‧廣播接收模組 551‧‧‧Broadcast receiving module

552‧‧‧短距離無線通訊模組 552‧‧‧Short-range wireless communication module

553‧‧‧GPS模組 553‧‧‧GPS module

554‧‧‧無線通訊模組 554‧‧‧Wireless communication module

560‧‧‧語音辨識單元 560‧‧‧Voice recognition unit

570‧‧‧運動辨識單元 570‧‧‧Sports identification unit

580‧‧‧揚聲器 580‧‧‧Speaker

590-1至590-n‧‧‧外部輸入埠 590-1 to 590-n‧‧‧ external input埠

595‧‧‧電力供應單元 595‧‧‧Power supply unit

600-1‧‧‧第一遊戲控制台 600-1‧‧‧ first game console

600-2‧‧‧第二遊戲控制台 600-2‧‧‧Second game console

700‧‧‧使用者終端設備 700‧‧‧User terminal equipment

710‧‧‧通訊單元 710‧‧‧Communication unit

720‧‧‧儲存單元 720‧‧‧ storage unit

730‧‧‧顯示單元 730‧‧‧Display unit

740‧‧‧控制單元 740‧‧‧Control unit

800‧‧‧NDEF訊息 800‧‧‧NDEF message

800-1至800-n‧‧‧NDEF記錄 800-1 to 800-n‧‧‧NDEF records

1000‧‧‧管理系統 1000‧‧‧Management System

1020‧‧‧家庭網域 1020‧‧‧Home domain

1040‧‧‧汽車網域 1040‧‧‧Automobile domain

1060‧‧‧辦公室網域 1060‧‧‧Office domain

2000‧‧‧管理系統 2000‧‧‧Management system

3000‧‧‧遊戲環境設定系統 3000‧‧‧ Game Environment Setting System

3101‧‧‧情境 3101‧‧‧ Situation

3102‧‧‧返回 3102‧‧‧Return

3201‧‧‧情境 3201‧‧‧ Situation

3202‧‧‧返回 3202‧‧‧Return

3301‧‧‧情境 3301‧‧‧ Situation

3401‧‧‧區域 3401‧‧‧Area

3402‧‧‧房間 3402‧‧‧ rooms

3501‧‧‧情境 3501‧‧‧ Situation

3502‧‧‧清新 3502‧‧‧Fresh

3503‧‧‧情境 3503‧‧‧ Situation

3504‧‧‧確認 3504‧‧‧Confirm

3505‧‧‧確認 3505‧‧‧Confirm

3601‧‧‧情境 3601‧‧‧ Situation

3602‧‧‧清新 3602‧‧‧Fresh

3603‧‧‧情境 3603‧‧‧ Situation

3604‧‧‧確認 3604‧‧‧Confirm

3605‧‧‧確認 3605‧‧‧Confirm

3701‧‧‧確認 3701‧‧‧Confirm

3801‧‧‧確認 3801‧‧‧Confirm

3802‧‧‧房間 3802‧‧‧ room

3901‧‧‧情境 3901‧‧‧ Situation

3902‧‧‧返回 3902‧‧‧Return

4001‧‧‧情境 4001‧‧‧ Situation

4002‧‧‧返回 4002‧‧‧Return

4101‧‧‧情境 4101‧‧‧ Situation

4301‧‧‧情境 4301‧‧‧ Situation

4302‧‧‧清新 4302‧‧‧Fresh

4303‧‧‧情境 4303‧‧‧ Situation

4304‧‧‧確認 4304‧‧‧Confirm

4305‧‧‧確認 4305‧‧‧Confirm

4401‧‧‧按鈕 4401‧‧‧ button

4402‧‧‧按鈕 4402‧‧‧ button

4403‧‧‧按鈕 4403‧‧‧ button

4404‧‧‧按鈕 4404‧‧‧ button

4405‧‧‧按鈕 4405‧‧‧ button

4501‧‧‧確認 4501‧‧‧Confirm

4601‧‧‧確認 4601‧‧‧Confirm

4602‧‧‧座椅 4602‧‧‧ seats

4701‧‧‧燈光 4701‧‧‧Lights

4702‧‧‧裝置控制 4702‧‧‧Device Control

S501‧‧‧操作 S501‧‧‧ operation

S502‧‧‧操作 S502‧‧‧ operation

S503‧‧‧操作 S503‧‧‧ operation

S504‧‧‧操作 S504‧‧‧ operation

S505‧‧‧操作 S505‧‧‧ operation

S506‧‧‧操作 S506‧‧‧ operation

S507‧‧‧操作 S507‧‧‧ operation

S601‧‧‧操作 S601‧‧‧ operation

S602‧‧‧操作 S602‧‧‧ operation

S603‧‧‧操作 S603‧‧‧ operation

S604‧‧‧操作 S604‧‧‧ operation

S701‧‧‧操作 S701‧‧‧ operation

S702‧‧‧操作 S702‧‧‧ operation

S703‧‧‧操作 S703‧‧‧ operation

S704‧‧‧操作 S704‧‧‧ operation

S705‧‧‧操作 S705‧‧‧ operation

S801‧‧‧操作 S801‧‧‧ operation

S802‧‧‧操作 S802‧‧‧ operation

S803‧‧‧操作 S803‧‧‧ operation

S804‧‧‧操作 S804‧‧‧ operation

S805‧‧‧操作 S805‧‧‧ operation

S806‧‧‧操作 S806‧‧‧ operation

S901‧‧‧操作 S901‧‧‧ operation

S902‧‧‧操作 S902‧‧‧ operation

S903‧‧‧操作 S903‧‧‧ operation

S1001‧‧‧操作 S1001‧‧‧ operation

S1002‧‧‧操作 S1002‧‧‧ operation

S1003‧‧‧操作 S1003‧‧‧ operation

S1004‧‧‧操作 S1004‧‧‧ operation

S1101‧‧‧操作 S1101‧‧‧ operation

S1102‧‧‧操作 S1102‧‧‧ operation

S1103‧‧‧操作 S1103‧‧‧ operation

S1104‧‧‧操作 S1104‧‧‧ operation

S1105‧‧‧操作 S1105‧‧‧ operation

S1106‧‧‧操作 S1106‧‧‧ operation

S1201‧‧‧操作 S1201‧‧‧ operation

S1202‧‧‧操作 S1202‧‧‧ operation

S1203‧‧‧操作 S1203‧‧‧ operation

S1204‧‧‧操作 S1204‧‧‧ operation

S1205‧‧‧操作 S1205‧‧‧ operation

S1206‧‧‧操作 S1206‧‧‧ operation

S1207‧‧‧操作 S1207‧‧‧ operation

S1208‧‧‧操作 S1208‧‧‧ operation

S1301‧‧‧操作 S1301‧‧‧ operation

S1302‧‧‧操作 S1302‧‧‧ operation

S1303‧‧‧操作 S1303‧‧‧ operation

S1304‧‧‧操作 S1304‧‧‧ operation

S1305‧‧‧操作 S1305‧‧‧ operation

S1401‧‧‧操作 S1401‧‧‧ operation

S1402‧‧‧操作 S1402‧‧‧ operation

S1403‧‧‧操作 S1403‧‧‧ operation

S1404‧‧‧操作 S1404‧‧‧ operation

S1501‧‧‧操作 S1501‧‧‧ operation

S1502‧‧‧操作 S1502‧‧‧ operation

S1503‧‧‧操作 S1503‧‧‧ operation

S1504‧‧‧操作 S1504‧‧‧ operation

S1505‧‧‧操作 S1505‧‧‧ operation

S1601‧‧‧操作 S1601‧‧‧ operation

S1602‧‧‧操作 S1602‧‧‧ operation

S1603‧‧‧操作 S1603‧‧‧ operation

S1604‧‧‧操作 S1604‧‧‧ operation

S1605‧‧‧操作 S1605‧‧‧ operation

S1606‧‧‧操作 S1606‧‧‧ operation

S1701‧‧‧操作 S1701‧‧‧ operation

S1702‧‧‧操作 S1702‧‧‧ operation

S1703‧‧‧操作 S1703‧‧‧ operation

S1704‧‧‧操作 S1704‧‧‧ operation

S1705‧‧‧操作 S1705‧‧‧ operation

S1706‧‧‧操作 S1706‧‧‧ operation

S1707‧‧‧操作 S1707‧‧‧ operation

S1708‧‧‧操作 S1708‧‧‧ operation

S1801‧‧‧操作 S1801‧‧‧ operation

S1802‧‧‧操作 S1802‧‧‧ operation

S1803‧‧‧操作 S1803‧‧‧ operation

S1804‧‧‧操作 S1804‧‧‧ operation

S1805‧‧‧操作 S1805‧‧‧ operation

S1901‧‧‧操作 S1901‧‧‧ operation

S1902‧‧‧操作 S1902‧‧‧ operation

S1903‧‧‧操作 S1903‧‧‧ operation

S1904‧‧‧操作 S1904‧‧‧ operation

S1905‧‧‧操作 S1905‧‧‧ operation

S1906‧‧‧操作 S1906‧‧‧ operation

S2001‧‧‧操作 S2001‧‧‧ operation

S2002‧‧‧操作 S2002‧‧‧ operation

S2003‧‧‧操作 S2003‧‧‧ operation

S2004‧‧‧操作 S2004‧‧‧ operation

S2005‧‧‧操作 S2005‧‧‧ operation

S2006‧‧‧操作 S2006‧‧‧ operation

S2007‧‧‧操作 S2007‧‧‧ operation

S2008‧‧‧操作 S2008‧‧‧ operation

S2009‧‧‧操作 S2009‧‧‧ operation

S2101‧‧‧操作 S2101‧‧‧ operation

S2102‧‧‧操作 S2102‧‧‧ operation

S2103‧‧‧操作 S2103‧‧‧ operation

S2104‧‧‧操作 S2104‧‧‧ operation

S2105‧‧‧操作 S2105‧‧‧ operation

S2106‧‧‧操作 S2106‧‧‧ operation

S2107‧‧‧操作 S2107‧‧‧ operation

S2108‧‧‧操作 S2108‧‧‧ operation

S2109‧‧‧操作 S2109‧‧‧ operation

S2201‧‧‧操作 S2201‧‧‧ operation

S2202‧‧‧操作 S2202‧‧‧ operation

S2203‧‧‧操作 S2203‧‧‧ operation

S2204‧‧‧操作 S2204‧‧‧ operation

S2205‧‧‧操作 S2205‧‧‧ operation

S2206‧‧‧操作 S2206‧‧‧ operation

S2207‧‧‧操作 S2207‧‧‧ operation

S2208‧‧‧操作 S2208‧‧‧ operation

S2209‧‧‧操作 S2209‧‧‧ operation

S2210‧‧‧操作 S2210‧‧‧ operation

S5001‧‧‧操作 S5001‧‧‧ operation

S5002‧‧‧操作 S5002‧‧‧ operation

S5003‧‧‧操作 S5003‧‧‧ operation

S5004‧‧‧操作 S5004‧‧‧ operation

S5005‧‧‧操作 S5005‧‧‧ operation

S5101‧‧‧操作 S5101‧‧‧ operation

S5102‧‧‧操作 S5102‧‧‧ operation

S5103‧‧‧操作 S5103‧‧‧ operation

S5104‧‧‧操作 S5104‧‧‧ operation

S5105‧‧‧操作 S5105‧‧‧ operation

S5106‧‧‧操作 S5106‧‧‧ operation

S5201‧‧‧操作 S5201‧‧‧ operation

S5202‧‧‧操作 S5202‧‧‧ operation

S5203‧‧‧操作 S5203‧‧‧ operation

S5204‧‧‧操作 S5204‧‧‧ operation

S5205‧‧‧操作 S5205‧‧‧ operation

S5206‧‧‧操作 S5206‧‧‧ operation

S5207‧‧‧操作 S5207‧‧‧ operation

S5208‧‧‧操作 S5208‧‧‧ operation

S5209‧‧‧操作 S5209‧‧‧ operation

S5210‧‧‧操作 S5210‧‧‧ operation

S5211‧‧‧操作 S5211‧‧‧ operation

S5212‧‧‧操作 S5212‧‧‧ operation

S5213‧‧‧操作 S5213‧‧‧ operation

S5214‧‧‧操作 S5214‧‧‧ operation

藉由參照附圖描述某些例示性實施例,上述及其他態樣將更顯而易見。 The above and other aspects will be more apparent from the description of certain exemplary embodiments.

圖1為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的管理系統的圖式。 1 is a diagram illustrating a management system in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present invention.

圖2為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的管理系統的圖式。 2 is a diagram illustrating a management system in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖3為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的管理伺服器的方塊圖。 3 is a block diagram of a management server in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖4為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的使用者終端設備的方塊圖。 4 is a block diagram of a user terminal device in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖5至圖7為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由管理伺服器執行。 5 through 7 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information and controlling at least one device based on setting information, the method being performed by a management server, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖8至圖10為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由使用者終端設備執行。 8 through 10 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information and controlling at least one device based on setting information, the method being performed by a user terminal device, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖11為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的儲存設定資 訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由鎖定設備執行。 FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a storage setting according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. And a timing diagram of a method of controlling at least one device based on setting information, the method being performed by a locking device.

圖12至圖14為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來操作的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由至少一個裝置執行。 12 through 14 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information and operating based on setting information, the method being performed by at least one device, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖15為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的藉由使用雲端伺服器來控制至少一個裝置的方法的時序圖。 FIG. 15 is a timing diagram illustrating a method of controlling at least one device by using a cloud server, according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖16為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的基於相關於設定資訊的環球資源定位器(URL)資訊來控制連接至外部伺服器的至少一個裝置的方法的時序圖。 FIG. 16 is a sequence diagram illustrating a method of controlling at least one device connected to an external server based on Global Source Locator (URL) information related to setting information, according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖17至圖19為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的將在使用至少一個裝置時更新的設定資訊儲存於管理伺服器中的方法的時序圖。 17 through 19 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information updated when at least one device is used in a management server, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖20至圖22為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的將在使用至少一個裝置時更新的設定資訊儲存於各種設備中的方法的時序圖。 20 through 22 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information updated when at least one device is used in various devices, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖23至圖25為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的控制家庭網域管理系統的方法的圖式。 23 through 25 are diagrams illustrating a method of controlling a home network domain management system, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖26至圖28為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的汽車網域管理系統的圖式。 26 through 28 are diagrams illustrating a vehicle domain management system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖29為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的訂購產品的方法的圖式。 29 is a diagram illustrating a method of ordering a product, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present invention.

圖30為根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的使用者終端設備的方塊圖。 FIG. 30 is a block diagram of a user terminal device in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖31至圖47說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的用於控制使用者終端設備的使用者介面(user interface;UI)畫面。 31 to 47 illustrate a user interface (UI) screen for controlling a user terminal device, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖48為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的遊戲環境設定系統的圖式。 FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game environment setting system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖49為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的遊戲環境設定系統中所包括的使用者終端設備的方塊圖。 FIG. 49 is a block diagram of a user terminal device included in a game environment setting system according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖50及圖51為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的設定遊戲環境資訊的方法的時序圖。 50 and 51 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of setting game environment information, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖52為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的操作汽車網域管理系統的方法的時序圖。 FIG. 52 is a timing diagram illustrating a method of operating an automotive domain management system, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

圖53為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的近場通訊資料交換格式(near-field communication data exchange format;NDEF)的圖式。 FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a near-field communication data exchange format (NDEF) according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

現將參照附圖來更詳細描述本發明的某些例示性實施例。 Certain exemplary embodiments of the present invention will now be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

在下文描述中,相同圖式參考數字用於相同元件,即使是在不同圖式中也是如此。提供下文描述中所定義的內容(諸如,詳細構造以及元件)以輔助全面理解本發明。因此,顯而易見的 是,可在無需此些具體定義的內容的情況下進行例示性實施例。此外,不會詳細描述熟知功能或構造,此是因為此等功能或構造中不必要的細節將會混淆本發明。 In the following description, the same drawing reference numerals are used for the same elements, even in different drawings. The matters defined in the following description, such as the detailed description and the elements are Therefore, it is obvious Yes, the illustrative embodiments may be practiced without such specific definitions. In addition, well-known functions or constructions are not described in detail, as the details of the functions or constructions are not necessary to obscure the invention.

圖1為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的管理系統1000的圖式。參照圖1,管理系統1000包括管理伺服器100、使用者終端設備200、至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)以及鎖定設備300-1。 FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a management system 1000 in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 1, the management system 1000 includes a management server 100, a user terminal device 200, at least one device (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) and The device 300-1 is locked.

此處,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的類型可根據裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n所處的網域而變化。舉例而言,若所述網域為家庭網域1020,則裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可為家中使用的裝置,例如,TV、洗衣機、空調、終端設備(例如,智慧型電話(smart phone)、平板型電腦(tablet computer)、筆記型電腦(notebook computer)、個人數位助理(personal digital assistant;PDA)、攜帶型多媒介播放器(portable multimedia player;PMP)、桌上型電腦(desktop computer)等)、冰箱、機器人吸塵器(robot cleaner)以及照明設施。若所述網域為汽車網域1040,則裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可為用於汽車的裝置,例如,把手、座椅、導航系統、音訊系統、空調等。若所述網域為辦公室網域1060,則裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可為用於辦公室的裝置,例如,TV、空調、終端設備(例如,智慧型電話、平板型電腦、筆記型電腦、PDA、PMP、桌上型電腦等)、冰箱、照明系統、投 影儀等。 Here, the types of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n may be according to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n changes in the domain in which it is located. For example, if the domain is the home domain 1020, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n may be devices used in the home, for example, TV, Washing machine, air conditioner, terminal equipment (for example, smart phone, tablet computer, notebook computer, personal digital assistant (PDA), portable multi-media player (portable multimedia player; PMP), desktop computer, etc., refrigerator, robot cleaner, and lighting. If the domain is the car domain 1040, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n may be devices for automobiles, such as handles, seats, Navigation system, audio system, air conditioning, etc. If the domain is the office domain 1060, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n may be devices for the office, for example, TV, air conditioner, terminal Equipment (for example, smart phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, PDAs, PMPs, desktop computers, etc.), refrigerators, lighting systems, investment Movies and so on.

在圖1中,「短距離存取」意謂第一裝置相對於第二裝置處於能夠建立短距離無線通訊的預定距離內。此處,「短距離存取」可基於近場通訊(Near field communication;NFC),所述NFC是在包含短距離無線通訊讀取器的第一裝置或第二裝置與包含短距離無線通訊標簽的其他裝置之間執行。 In FIG. 1, "short distance access" means that the first device is within a predetermined distance from which the second device can establish short-range wireless communication. Here, "short-range access" may be based on Near Field Communication (NFC), which is a first device or a second device including a short-range wireless communication reader and a short-range wireless communication tag Executed between other devices.

鎖定設備300-1可為安裝在家庭網域1020、汽車網域1040或辦公室網域1060的入口處以允許或禁止使用者進入此等網域的設備。在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可基於藉由短距離存取使用者終端設備200而接收的授權資訊來釋放或設定鎖定。鎖定設備300-1可實現為安裝在入口處的門鎖(door lock),且所述門鎖可包括短距離無線通訊模組,例如,NFC模組。然而,鎖定設備300-1不限於上述實施例。鎖定設備300-1可實現為安裝在家庭網域1020、汽車網域1040以及辦公室網域1060的入口或內部中的終端設備(例如,智慧型電話、平板型電腦、筆記型電腦、PDA、PMP或桌上型電腦),且包括支援鎖定功能以提供使用者介面(user interface;UI)畫面的軟體。在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可藉由短距離存取使用者終端設備200或基於根據對鎖定UI畫面的使用者輸入而接收的授權資訊(例如,密碼及/或使用者識別碼(identification;ID))來釋放或設定自身的鎖定狀態。 The locking device 300-1 can be a device installed at the entrance of the home domain 1020, the car domain 1040, or the office domain 1060 to allow or prohibit users from entering such domains. In this case, the locking device 300-1 can release or set the lock based on the authorization information received by the short-distance access to the user terminal device 200. The locking device 300-1 can be implemented as a door lock installed at the entrance, and the door lock can include a short-range wireless communication module, such as an NFC module. However, the locking device 300-1 is not limited to the above embodiment. The locking device 300-1 can be implemented as a terminal device installed in the entrance or interior of the home network domain 1020, the car network domain 1040, and the office domain 1060 (for example, a smart phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a PDA, a PMP). Or a desktop computer, and includes software that supports a lock function to provide a user interface (UI) screen. In this case, the locking device 300-1 can access the user terminal device 200 by short distance or based on authorization information (eg, a password and/or a user identification code (eg, a password and/or a user identification code) received according to user input to the locked UI screen ( Identification; ID)) to release or set its own lock state.

雖然圖1說明鎖定設備300-1實現為額外設備的狀況,但鎖定設備300-1可包括於管理伺服器100中。在此狀況下,鎖定 設備300-1可如下所述執行管理伺服器100的功能。 Although FIG. 1 illustrates a situation in which the locking device 300-1 is implemented as an additional device, the locking device 300-1 may be included in the management server 100. In this situation, locked The device 300-1 can perform the functions of the management server 100 as described below.

管理伺服器100控制網域1020、1040及1060中所包括的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。具體而言,在鎖定設備300-1藉由在儲存授權資訊的使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取而釋放鎖定時,管理伺服器100可自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。換句話說,使用者終端設備的儲存單元220可儲存對應於網域1020、1040及1060中的使用者資訊。此處,使用者資訊可包括授權資訊、使用者ID資訊以及設定資訊中的至少一者。控制單元230中所包括的使用者資訊管理單元231可自儲存單元220偵測對應於各網域1020、1040及1060中的使用者資訊。因此,使用者終端設備200可將對應於各網域1020、1040及1060中的使用者資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。鎖定設備300-1可基於所接收的使用者資訊中所包括的授權資訊而釋放或設定自身的鎖定,且可將自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者資訊中所包括的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 The management server 100 controls the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n included in the domains 1020, 1040, and 1060. Specifically, when the locking device 300-1 releases the lock by performing short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 storing the authorization information and the locking device 300-1, the management server 100 can self-lock the device 300- 1 Receive user ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200. In other words, the storage unit 220 of the user terminal device can store user information corresponding to the domains 1020, 1040, and 1060. Here, the user information may include at least one of authorization information, user ID information, and setting information. The user information management unit 231 included in the control unit 230 can detect user information corresponding to each of the network domains 1020, 1040, and 1060 from the storage unit 220. Therefore, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the user information corresponding to each of the domains 1020, 1040, and 1060 to the locking device 300-1. The locking device 300-1 may release or set its own lock based on the authorization information included in the received user information, and may include user ID information included in the user information received from the user terminal device 200 or The setting information is transmitted to the management server 100.

在管理伺服器100接收使用者ID資訊時,管理伺服器100可提取對應於所接收的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。接著,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊來控制所述網域中的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 When the management server 100 receives the user ID information, the management server 100 may extract setting information corresponding to the received user ID information. Next, the management server 100 can control the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in the domain based on the extracted setting information.

另外,在管理伺服器100自鎖定設備300-1接收設定資訊時,管理伺服器100可基於所接收的設定資訊來控制所述網域中 的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 In addition, when the management server 100 receives the setting information from the locking device 300-1, the management server 100 can control the domain based on the received setting information. Devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

雖然在上文描述管理伺服器100自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200的使用者ID資訊或使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊,但操作不限於此。舉例而言,在使用者終端設備200的使用者位於所述網域中時,所述使用者可在使用者終端設備200與管理伺服器100之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可直接自使用者終端設備200接收使用者終端設備200的使用者ID資訊或使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊。另外,在使用者在使用者終端設備200與裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n之間執行短距離存取時,管理伺服器100可經由裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而接收使用者終端設備200的使用者ID資訊或使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊。 Although the management server 100 receives the user ID information of the user terminal device 200 or the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 from the lock device 300-1, the operation is not limited thereto. For example, when the user of the user terminal device 200 is located in the domain, the user can perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can directly receive the user ID information of the user terminal device 200 or the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 from the user terminal device 200. In addition, when the user performs short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n, the management server 100 can be The devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n receive the user ID information of the user terminal device 200 or the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200.

鎖定設備300-1已在上文描述為安裝於網域1020、1040及1060的入口中中的門鎖。然而,在鎖定設備300-1實現為包括支援鎖定功能的軟體且因此提供鎖定UI畫面的終端設備時,鎖定設備300-1可藉由短距離存取使用者終端設備200或基於根據相關於鎖定UI畫面的使用者輸入而接收的授權資訊(例如,密碼及/或使用者ID)而執行上述操作。 The locking device 300-1 has been described above as a door lock installed in the entrances of the domains 1020, 1040, and 1060. However, when the locking device 300-1 is implemented to include a software that supports the locking function and thus provides a terminal device that locks the UI picture, the locking device 300-1 can access the user terminal device 200 by short distance or based on the related locking The above operation is performed by the authorization information (for example, the password and/or the user ID) received by the user input of the UI screen.

此處,在家庭網域1020的狀況下,授權資訊可為用於釋放或設定鎖定設備300-1(其為家庭鎖定設備)的鎖定的家庭金鑰資訊。在汽車網域1040的狀況下,授權資訊可為用於釋放或設定鎖定設備300-1(其為汽車鎖定設備)的鎖定的汽車金鑰資訊。在 辦公室網域1060的狀況下,授權資訊可為用於釋放或設定鎖定設備300-1(其為辦公室鎖定設備)的鎖定的辦公室金鑰資訊。 Here, in the case of the home domain 1020, the authorization information may be locked home key information for releasing or setting the locking device 300-1, which is a home locking device. In the case of the car domain 1040, the authorization information may be locked car key information for releasing or setting the locking device 300-1, which is a car locking device. in In the case of the office domain 1060, the authorization information may be locked office key information for releasing or setting the locking device 300-1, which is an office locking device.

在鎖定設備300-1實現為儲存支援鎖定功能的軟體且因此提供鎖定UI畫面的終端設備(諸如,個人電腦(personal computer;PC))時,授權資訊可為密碼及/或使用者ID。 When the locking device 300-1 is implemented as a software that stores a lock-enabled function and thus provides a terminal device (such as a personal computer (PC)) that locks the UI screen, the authorization information may be a password and/or a user ID.

然而,授權資訊不限於此,且授權資訊可為用於存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的其他各種授權資訊中的任一者。 However, the authorization information is not limited thereto, and the authorization information may be any of various other authorization information for accessing the domain managed by the management server 100.

因此,使用者終端設備200基於授權資訊而存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域可意謂:基於授權資訊而釋放鎖定設備300-1的鎖定,並存取管理伺服器100。 Therefore, accessing the domain managed by the management server 100 based on the authorization information by the user terminal device 200 may mean releasing the lock of the lock device 300-1 based on the authorization information and accessing the management server 100.

此處,網域意謂由管理伺服器100管理的範圍或網路。所述範圍可不僅包括裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n,而且包括存取管理伺服器100的使用者終端設備200。亦即,使用者終端設備200可由管理伺服器100基於設定資訊來控制。 Here, the domain means the range or network managed by the management server 100. The range may include not only the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n but also the user terminal device 200 accessing the management server 100. That is, the user terminal device 200 can be controlled by the management server 100 based on the setting information.

此處,使用者ID資訊意謂用於識別多個使用者的資訊,例如,使用者終端設備200的使用者的使用者ID、電話號碼或序列號。在此狀況下,使用者ID資訊可包括針對多個使用者中而設定的個別使用者ID資訊,以及針對包括多個使用者的群組而設定的群組使用者ID資訊。 Here, the user ID information means information for identifying a plurality of users, for example, a user ID, a phone number, or a serial number of the user of the user terminal device 200. In this case, the user ID information may include individual user ID information set for a plurality of users, and group user ID information set for a group including a plurality of users.

可針對每一網域來不同地設定使用者ID資訊。舉例而言,指派給同一使用者的家庭網域1020的使用者ID資訊、汽車網域1040的使用者ID資訊以及辦公室網域1060的使用者ID資 訊可彼此不同。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可傳輸對應於適當網域的使用者ID資訊。舉例而言,若使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取家庭網域1020中所包括的鎖定設備300-1、管理伺服器100以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n來辨識家庭網域1020,則使用者終端設備200可自儲存單元220提取對應於家庭網域1020的使用者ID資訊,並將使用者ID資訊傳輸至家庭網域1020中的鎖定設備300-1、管理伺服器100以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。此外,設定資訊可包括相關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的環境資訊,所述環境資訊是由對應於使用者ID資訊的使用者設定。此處,設定資訊可包括裝置資訊、修改時間資訊、修改場所資訊、裝置設定資訊等。裝置資訊可為關於物件(例如,TV或空調)的資訊。修改時間資訊可為修改裝置設定資訊時的時間。修改場所資訊可為關於修改裝置設定資訊的場所的資訊。舉例而言,在TV的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊、頻道資訊、音量資訊、影像品質資訊、關於最近觀看的TV節目的清單的資訊等。在空調的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊、溫度資訊、氣流資訊等。在洗衣機的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為水溫資訊、洗滌資訊等。在閉路TV(close circuit TV;CCTV)的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊。在機器人吸塵器的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊。在鍋爐的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊、溫度資訊等。在燈的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為亮度資訊、開/關資訊等。在PC的狀況下,裝置設 定資訊可為開/關資訊、畫面亮度資訊、音量資訊、滑鼠敏感度資訊、使用者ID資訊、密碼資訊等。在投影儀(projector)的狀況下,裝置設定資訊可為開/關資訊。 User ID information can be set differently for each domain. For example, the user ID information of the home domain 1020 assigned to the same user, the user ID information of the car domain 1040, and the user ID of the office domain 1060. The messages can be different from each other. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can transmit user ID information corresponding to the appropriate domain. For example, if the user terminal device 200 accesses the locking device 300-1, the management server 100, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ... included in the home network domain 1020 by short distance. ...., 300-n to identify the home domain 1020, the user terminal device 200 can extract the user ID information corresponding to the home domain 1020 from the storage unit 220, and transmit the user ID information to the home domain. Locking device 300-1, management server 100, and devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in 1020. In addition, the setting information may include environmental information related to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, . . . , 300-n, the environmental information being the user corresponding to the user ID information. set up. Here, the setting information may include device information, modification time information, modification of place information, device setting information, and the like. Device information can be information about an object (eg, TV or air conditioner). Modify the time information to set the time when the device is modified. Modifying the location information may be information about the location where the device is modified to set information. For example, in the case of the TV, the device setting information may be on/off information, channel information, volume information, image quality information, information about a list of recently watched TV programs, and the like. In the case of an air conditioner, the device setting information may be on/off information, temperature information, airflow information, and the like. In the case of the washing machine, the device setting information may be water temperature information, washing information, and the like. In the case of a closed circuit TV (CCTV), the device setting information may be on/off information. In the case of a robot cleaner, the device setting information can be on/off information. In the condition of the boiler, the device setting information may be on/off information, temperature information, and the like. In the case of the light, the device setting information may be brightness information, on/off information, and the like. In the case of a PC, the device is designed The information can be on/off information, screen brightness information, volume information, mouse sensitivity information, user ID information, password information, and the like. In the case of a projector, the device setting information can be on/off information.

在一個實施方案中,基於管理系統1000的操作,可如下所述準備會議。具體而言,在使用者在安裝於會議室的入口處的鎖定設備300-1與使用者終端設備200之間執行短距離存取時,安裝於會議室中的PC可開啟,且使用者ID及密碼可自動輸入至PC以執行PC的作業系統(OS)。此外,安裝於會議室中的投影儀可開啟,藉此完成會議的準備。 In one embodiment, based on the operation of management system 1000, a meeting can be prepared as described below. Specifically, when the user performs short-distance access between the locking device 300-1 installed at the entrance of the conference room and the user terminal device 200, the PC installed in the conference room can be turned on, and the user ID And the password can be automatically input to the PC to execute the operating system (OS) of the PC. In addition, the projector installed in the conference room can be turned on to complete the meeting preparation.

可在使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n之間共用設定資訊。 The setting information can be shared between the user terminal device 200, the management server 100, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

此外,以網路為單位,可對授權資訊、使用者ID資訊以及設定資訊指派不同協定(protocols)。舉例而言,用於家庭網路的協定及用於汽車網路的協定可彼此不同。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可藉由選擇對應於網路的協定來使用授權資訊、使用者ID資訊以及設定資訊。 In addition, different protocols (protocols) can be assigned to authorization information, user ID information, and setting information. For example, agreements for home networks and agreements for car networks may differ from one another. In this case, the user terminal device 200, the management server 100 or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be selected by selecting a protocol corresponding to the network. Use authorization information, user ID information, and settings information.

圖2為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的管理系統2000的圖式。請參照圖2,管理系統2000包括管理伺服器100、使用者終端設備200、至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)以及雲端伺服器400中的至少一些。 FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a management system 2000 in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 2, the management system 2000 includes a management server 100, a user terminal device 200, and at least one device (for example, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n). And at least some of the cloud servers 400.

雲端伺服器400可儲存對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資 訊。具體而言,雲端伺服器400可儲存設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊。設定資訊可映射至使用者ID資訊,且接著自連結至雲端伺服器400的使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n傳輸。在此狀況下,在改變關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的設定資訊時或在輸入指示收集設定資訊的使用者命令時,可自使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n收集設定資訊。接著,可將所收集的設定資訊映射至使用者ID資訊,並接著傳輸。 The cloud server 400 can store the setting information corresponding to the user ID information. News. Specifically, the cloud server 400 can store the setting information to map to the user ID information. The setting information can be mapped to the user ID information, and then automatically connected to the user terminal device 200 of the cloud server 400, the management server 100, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ... , 300-n transmission. In this case, when changing the setting information about the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n or when inputting a user command indicating that the setting information is collected, The setting information is collected from the user terminal device 200, the management server 100, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. The collected setting information can then be mapped to the user ID information and then transmitted.

此外,雲端伺服器400可儲存對應於個別使用者ID資訊的設定資訊以及對應於群組使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,以使得其彼此有所不同。 In addition, the cloud server 400 can store setting information corresponding to individual user ID information and setting information corresponding to the group user ID information so as to be different from each other.

使用者終端設備200可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。然而,使用者ID傳輸不限於此,且使用者ID資訊可自管理伺服器100或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n傳輸至雲端伺服器400。 The user terminal device 200 can transmit the user ID information to the cloud server 400. However, the user ID transmission is not limited thereto, and the user ID information can be transmitted from the management server 100 or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the cloud server. 400.

在此狀況下,雲端伺服器400提取對應於所接收的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,且接著將所提取的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 In this case, the cloud server 400 extracts setting information corresponding to the received user ID information, and then transmits the extracted setting information to the management server 100.

在此狀況下,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可基於設定資訊進行操作。 In this case, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can operate based on the setting information.

此外,雲端伺服器400可將對應於使用者ID資訊的設定 資訊提供至使用者終端設備200。 In addition, the cloud server 400 can set the information corresponding to the user ID information. Information is provided to the user terminal device 200.

上文參照圖1及圖2所述的管理系統1000及2000可各自執行相關於鑑別方法的整合式鑑別(intergrated authentication)或依序鑑別(sequential authentication)。 The management systems 1000 and 2000 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 may each perform an integrated authentication or a sequential authentication related to the authentication method.

在整合式鑑別的狀況下,當在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取時,使用者終端設備200可將授權資訊與使用者ID資訊兩者傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可基於所接收的授權資訊而釋放或設定自身的鎖定狀態,且可將所接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400可基於使用者ID資訊是否已註冊而將鑑別的結果傳輸至使用者終端設備200。 In the case of integrated authentication, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1, the user terminal device 200 can transmit both the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device. 300-1. In this case, the locking device 300-1 may release or set its own locked state based on the received authorization information, and may transmit the received user ID information to the management server 100 or the cloud server 400. In this case, the management server 100 or the cloud server 400 can transmit the result of the authentication to the user terminal device 200 based on whether the user ID information has been registered.

在依序鑑別的狀況下,當在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取時,使用者終端設備200可將授權資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可基於所接收的授權資訊以及對使用者終端設備200鑑別授權資訊的結果而釋放或設定自身的鎖定狀態。在授權資訊得以鑑別時,使用者終端設備200可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可將所接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400。接著,管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400可基於使用者ID資訊是否已註冊而將鑑別的結果傳輸至使用者終端設備200。 In the case of sequential authentication, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 200 and the lock device 300-1, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the authorization information to the lock device 300-1. In this case, the locking device 300-1 can release or set its own locked state based on the received authorization information and the result of authenticating the authorization information to the user terminal device 200. When the authorization information is authenticated, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the user ID information to the locking device 300-1. In this case, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the received user ID information to the management server 100 or the cloud server 400. Next, the management server 100 or the cloud server 400 can transmit the result of the authentication to the user terminal device 200 based on whether the user ID information has been registered.

此處,可按照訊息(例如,短訊息服務(short message service;SMS)或多媒介訊息服務(multi-media message service;MMS))的形式來傳輸鑑別的結果。 Here, the result of the authentication may be transmitted in the form of a message such as a short message service (SMS) or a multi-media message service (MMS).

使用者終端設備200的儲存單元220可儲存對應於網域中的使用者資訊。在此狀況下,使用者資訊可包括授權資訊、使用者ID資訊以及設定資訊中的至少一者。控制單元230的使用者資訊管理單元231可自儲存單元220偵測對應於各網域中的使用者資訊。因此,使用者終端設備200可將對應於各網域中的使用者資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。鎖定設備300-1可基於所接收的使用者資訊中所包括的授權資訊而釋放或設定自身的鎖定狀態,且使用者終端設備200可將所接收的使用者資訊中所包括的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 The storage unit 220 of the user terminal device 200 can store user information corresponding to the domain. In this case, the user information may include at least one of authorization information, user ID information, and setting information. The user information management unit 231 of the control unit 230 can detect user information corresponding to each domain from the storage unit 220. Therefore, the user terminal device 200 can transmit user information corresponding to each domain to the locking device 300-1. The locking device 300-1 can release or set its own locking state based on the authorization information included in the received user information, and the user terminal device 200 can display the user ID information included in the received user information. Or the setting information is transmitted to the management server 100.

在管理伺服器100接收使用者ID資訊時,管理伺服器100可提取對應於所接收的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。接著,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊來控制所述網域中所包括的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 When the management server 100 receives the user ID information, the management server 100 may extract setting information corresponding to the received user ID information. Next, the management server 100 can control the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n included in the domain based on the extracted setting information.

另外,在管理伺服器100自鎖定設備300-1接收設定資訊時,管理伺服器100可基於所接收的設定資訊來控制所述網域中的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 In addition, when the management server 100 receives the setting information from the locking device 300-1, the management server 100 can control the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the domain based on the received setting information. ..., 300-n.

圖3為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的管理伺服器100的方塊圖。請參照圖3,管理伺服器100包括通訊單元110、儲存單元120以及控制單元130。 FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a management server 100 in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 3, the management server 100 includes a communication unit 110, a storage unit 120, and a control unit 130.

通訊單元110連接管理伺服器100與外部裝置。特定而言,在儲存授權資訊的使用者終端設備200基於授權資訊而存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,通訊單元110可自使用者終端設備200接收使用者ID資訊。 The communication unit 110 connects the management server 100 with an external device. In particular, when the user terminal device 200 storing the authorization information accesses the domain managed by the management server 100 based on the authorization information, the communication unit 110 can receive the user ID information from the user terminal device 200.

另外,在儲存授權資訊的使用者終端設備200基於授權資訊而存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,通訊單元110可接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊。 In addition, when the user terminal device 200 storing the authorization information accesses the domain managed by the management server 100 based on the authorization information, the communication unit 110 can receive the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200.

此處,通訊單元110可藉由短距離存取使用者終端設備200而接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。舉例而言,如下文參照圖6及圖9所描述,在使用者在使用者終端設備200與外部伺服器之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元110可經由短距離存取而自使用者終端設備200接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。 Here, the communication unit 110 can receive the user ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 by short-distance access to the user terminal device 200. For example, as described below with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 9, when the user performs short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and an external server, the communication unit 110 can access the user via short-distance access. The terminal device 200 receives user ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200.

此外,在使用者終端設備200藉由短距離無線通訊而將使用者終端設備200中所儲存的授權資訊及使用者ID資訊或授權資訊及設定資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1時,通訊單元110可自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。舉例而言,在使用者在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取時,鎖定設備300-1可基於授權資訊來判定由管理伺服器100管理的網域是否可由使用者存取,並接著根據判定網域是否可由使用者存取的結果而判定是否釋放自身的鎖定狀態。在此狀況下,如下文參照圖5及圖8所描述,在釋 放鎖定設備300-1的鎖定狀態時,通訊單元110可自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。 In addition, when the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information or the authorization information and the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 to the locking device 300-1 by short-range wireless communication, the communication unit 110 The user ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 can be received from the locking device 300-1. For example, when the user performs short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1, the locking device 300-1 may determine whether the domain managed by the management server 100 is available based on the authorization information. The user accesses and then decides whether to release its own locked state based on the result of determining whether the domain is accessible by the user. In this case, as described below with reference to Figures 5 and 8, When the locked state of the locking device 300-1 is released, the communication unit 110 can receive the user ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 from the locking device 300-1.

此外,在使用者終端設備200藉由短距離無線通訊而將使用者ID資訊提供至除鎖定設備300-1之外的至少一個裝置時,通訊單元110可自所述至少一個裝置接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。舉例而言,如下文參照圖7及圖10所描述,在使用者在使用者終端設備200與除鎖定設備300-1之外的至少一個裝置之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元110可自所述至少一個裝置接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊或設定資訊。 In addition, when the user terminal device 200 provides the user ID information to at least one device other than the locking device 300-1 by short-range wireless communication, the communication unit 110 may receive the user terminal from the at least one device. User ID information or setting information stored in the device 200. For example, as described below with reference to FIG. 7 and FIG. 10, when the user performs short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and at least one device other than the locking device 300-1, the communication unit 110 may User ID information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 is received from the at least one device.

此外,在使用者終端設備200根據短距離無線通訊而將授權資訊及使用者ID資訊提供至鎖定設備300-1時,通訊單元110可自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的授權資訊及使用者ID資訊或授權資訊及設定資訊。舉例而言,在使用者於使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元110可自鎖定設備300-1接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的授權資訊及使用者ID資訊或授權資訊及設定資訊。在此狀況下,如下文參照圖5及圖8所述,控制單元120可基於所接收的授權資訊是否為讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器管理的網域的授權資訊,來控制釋放或設定鎖定設備300-1的鎖定狀態。 In addition, when the user terminal device 200 provides the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 according to the short-range wireless communication, the communication unit 110 can receive the stored in the user terminal device 200 from the locking device 300-1. Authorization information and user ID information or authorization information and setting information. For example, when the user performs short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1, the communication unit 110 can receive the authorization information stored in the user terminal device 200 from the locking device 300-1. And user ID information or authorization information and setting information. In this case, as described below with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, the control unit 120 may be based on whether the received authorization information is to enable the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server. The control releases or sets the locked state of the locking device 300-1.

此處,可在使用者終端設備200與管理伺服器100、鎖定 設備300-1以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的一者之間執行短距離無線通訊。具體而言,在短距離無線通訊的狀況下,使用者終端設備200包括短距離無線通訊標簽,且管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n各自包括短距離無線通訊讀取器。在此狀況下,在使用者終端設備200處於管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的短距離通訊範圍內時,管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中所包括的短距離無線通訊讀取器讀取使用者終端設備200中所包括的短距離無線通訊標簽中所記錄的資訊。 Here, the user terminal device 200 and the management server 100 can be locked. Short-range wireless communication is performed between device 300-1 and one of devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. Specifically, in the case of short-range wireless communication, the user terminal device 200 includes a short-range wireless communication tag, and the management server 100, the locking device 300-1, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n each include a short-range wireless communication reader. In this case, the short-distance communication in which the user terminal device 200 is in the management server 100, the locking device 300-1, or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n Within the range, the short-range wireless communication reader included in the management server 100, the locking device 300-1, or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n reads The information recorded in the short-range wireless communication tag included in the user terminal device 200 is taken.

此處,「短距離存取」意謂使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的至少一者處於可建立短距離無線通訊的通訊範圍內。在使用者終端設備200、管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1以及裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的至少一者在此區域內移動時,管理伺服器100、鎖定設備300-1或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中所包括的短距離無線通訊讀取器可讀取外部裝置中所包括的短距離無線通訊標簽中所記錄的資訊。短距離無線通訊的實例可為近場通訊(NFC)。NFC是使用13.56兆赫的頻率的非接觸短距離無線通訊技術。若使用NFC技術,則在多個終端在約10公分或10公分以下的短距離內彼此存取時,可交換資料。在提供短距離存取時,短距離無線通訊讀取器可自外部裝置 中所包括的短距離無線通訊標簽接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的使用者ID資訊、授權資訊或設定資訊。 Here, "short distance access" means the user terminal device 200, the management server 100, the lock device 300-1, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300- At least one of n is within communication range in which short-range wireless communication can be established. At least one of the user terminal device 200, the management server 100, the locking device 300-1, and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is in this area When moving, the short-range wireless communication reader included in the management server 100, the locking device 300-1, or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is readable Take the information recorded in the short-range wireless communication tag included in the external device. An example of short-range wireless communication may be Near Field Communication (NFC). NFC is a non-contact short-range wireless communication technology using a frequency of 13.56 MHz. If NFC technology is used, data can be exchanged when a plurality of terminals access each other within a short distance of about 10 cm or less. Short-range wireless communication readers are available from external devices when providing short-distance access The short-range wireless communication tag included in the user receives the user ID information, authorization information or setting information stored in the user terminal device 200.

短距離無線通訊的其他實例可包括基於條碼(barcode)的方法、基於快速回應(quick response;QR)碼的方法、Wi-Fi、ZigBee、藍芽(Bluetooth)等。 Other examples of short-range wireless communication may include bar code based methods, quick response (QR) code based methods, Wi-Fi, ZigBee, Bluetooth, and the like.

NFC標簽(tag)可包括積體電路(integrated circuit;IC)及天線線圈。在對包括NFC讀取器的設備執行短距離存取時,NFC模組由自NFC讀取器發射的電磁波驅動,且傳輸含有NFC標簽中所記錄的資訊的射頻(radio-frequency;RF)訊號。由於自NFC讀取器發射的電磁波而由NFC標簽中的天線線圈誘發電流。所誘發的電流在NFC標簽中所包括的電容器中充電。IC由電容器中所充電的電流驅動,並對所儲存的資訊進行調變或編碼以產生RF訊號。 The NFC tag may include an integrated circuit (IC) and an antenna coil. When performing short-range access to a device including an NFC reader, the NFC module is driven by electromagnetic waves emitted from the NFC reader and transmits a radio-frequency (RF) signal containing information recorded in the NFC tag. . Current is induced by the antenna coils in the NFC tag due to electromagnetic waves emitted from the NFC reader. The induced current is charged in a capacitor included in the NFC tag. The IC is driven by the current charged in the capacitor and modulates or encodes the stored information to produce an RF signal.

NFC模組可根據各種調變技術及編碼技術中的預定調變技術及編碼技術來產生RF訊號。此處,調變技術可為藉由改變(例如)在NFC標簽與NFC讀取器之間交換的RF載波訊號的振幅、頻率以及相位而載入資料的技術。調變技術包括振幅移位鍵控(amplitude shift keying;ASK)、頻率移位鍵控(frequency shift keying;FSK)、相位移位鍵控(phase shift keying;PSK)等。在ASK中,載波訊號的振幅根據數位資訊訊號為「0」或是「1」而移位。舉例而言,在數位資訊訊號為「0」時,減小載波訊號的振幅,且在數位資訊訊號為「1」時,增大載波訊號的振幅,並接著 傳輸載波訊號。可在使用雙階躍訊號振幅(two-step signal amplitude)時傳輸1個位元,且在使用四階躍訊號振幅時同時傳輸2個位元。在FSK中,藉由將位元0及1分別分配給兩個不同頻率(例如,低頻及高頻)而傳輸作為數位訊號的位元0及1。舉例而言,藉由在資訊訊號為「0」時產生低於載波頻率的頻率,且在資訊訊號為「1」時產生高於載波頻率的頻率,而傳輸資訊訊號。在PSK中,根據待傳輸的資料而改變載波的相位。藉由待傳輸的資料來判定將改變載波的相位的度數。在待傳輸的資料為「0」時,將載波的相位移位180度,且在待傳輸的資料為「1」時,將載波的相位移位90度,且以位元為基礎立即傳輸每一段資訊。此外,編碼技術的實例可包括修改型密勒編碼方法(modified Miller coding method)以及曼徹斯特編碼方法(Manchester coding method)。 The NFC module can generate RF signals according to predetermined modulation techniques and coding techniques in various modulation techniques and coding techniques. Here, the modulation technique may be a technique of loading data by changing, for example, the amplitude, frequency, and phase of an RF carrier signal exchanged between an NFC tag and an NFC reader. Modulation techniques include amplitude shift keying (ASK), frequency shift keying (FSK), phase shift keying (PSK), and the like. In ASK, the amplitude of the carrier signal is shifted according to whether the digital information signal is "0" or "1". For example, when the digital information signal is “0”, the amplitude of the carrier signal is reduced, and when the digital information signal is “1”, the amplitude of the carrier signal is increased, and then Transmit carrier signals. One bit can be transmitted when a two-step signal amplitude is used, and two bits are simultaneously transmitted when a fourth-order signal amplitude is used. In the FSK, bits 0 and 1 which are digital signals are transmitted by assigning bits 0 and 1 to two different frequencies (for example, low frequency and high frequency), respectively. For example, an information signal is transmitted by generating a frequency lower than the carrier frequency when the information signal is “0” and generating a frequency higher than the carrier frequency when the information signal is “1”. In PSK, the phase of the carrier is changed according to the data to be transmitted. The degree of the phase at which the carrier will be changed is determined by the data to be transmitted. When the data to be transmitted is "0", the phase of the carrier is shifted by 180 degrees, and when the data to be transmitted is "1", the phase of the carrier is shifted by 90 degrees, and each bit is transmitted immediately on a bit basis. A piece of information. Further, examples of the encoding technique may include a modified Miller coding method and a Manchester coding method.

可根據裝置的類型及周圍環境來適當地選擇調變技術及編碼技術。若NFC標簽為被動型標簽(所述被動型標簽不包括電池且由所誘發的電流驅動,所述所誘發的電流是由於自NFC讀取器發射的電磁波而誘發),則可使用ASK及曼徹斯特編碼方法。若NFC標簽為主動型標簽(所述主動型標簽能夠產生電力且與外部NFC讀取器通訊),則可按照16千位元/秒的速度來使用ASK及修改型密勒編碼方法,且可按照212千位元/秒及424千位元/秒的速度來使用ASK及曼徹斯特編碼方法。 Modulation technology and coding technology can be appropriately selected according to the type of the device and the surrounding environment. If the NFC tag is a passive tag (the passive tag does not include a battery and is driven by the induced current, which is induced by electromagnetic waves emitted from the NFC reader), ASK and Manchester can be used. Coding method. If the NFC tag is an active tag (the active tag can generate power and communicate with an external NFC reader), the ASK and modified Miller encoding methods can be used at a rate of 16 kilobits per second. The ASK and Manchester encoding methods are used at speeds of 212 kilobits per second and 424 kilobits per second.

如下文參照圖53所描述,可根據NFC資料交換格式 (near-field communication data exchange format;NDEF)來傳輸及接收包括授權資訊、使用者ID資訊以及設定資訊中的至少一者的使用者資訊。 As described below with reference to Figure 53, the NFC data exchange format can be used. (near-field communication data exchange format; NDEF) to transmit and receive user information including at least one of authorization information, user ID information, and setting information.

圖53為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的近場通訊資料交換格式的圖式。參照圖53,NDEF訊息800為一種基本訊息單元,包括多個NDEF記錄800-1、800-2及800-n。 53 is a diagram illustrating a near field communication data exchange format in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to Figure 53, the NDEF message 800 is a basic message unit comprising a plurality of NDEF records 800-1, 800-2 and 800-n.

此處,多個NDEF記錄800-1、800-2及800-n中可包括:表示關於記錄的基本資訊的記錄標頭欄位、表示資料類型的長度的類型長度欄位、表示有效負載的長度的有效負載長度欄位、表示ID長度的ID長度欄位、表示記錄中所包括的有效負載的類型的類型欄位、表示記錄中所包括的有效負載的ID的有效負載ID欄位以及表示記錄中所包括的有效負載的有效負載欄位。 Here, the plurality of NDEF records 800-1, 800-2, and 800-n may include: a record header field indicating basic information about the record, a type length field indicating the length of the material type, and a payload indicating the payload. The payload length field of the length, the ID length field indicating the length of the ID, the type field indicating the type of the payload included in the record, the payload ID field indicating the ID of the payload included in the record, and the representation The payload field of the payload included in the record.

多個NDEF記錄800-1、800-2及800-n中可含有一段資料(其為有效負載),且可為傳輸/接收所述有效負載所需。 A plurality of NDEF records 800-1, 800-2, and 800-n may contain a piece of data (which is a payload) and may be required to transmit/receive the payload.

因此,在傳輸/接收授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊時,可分別經由一個NDEF訊息800的不同NDEF記錄800-1、800-2、......、800-n中的兩個NDEF記錄來傳輸/接收授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊。 Therefore, when transmitting/receiving the authorization information and the user ID information, two NDEF records of 800-1, 800-2, ..., 800-n can be recorded via different NDEFs of one NDEF message 800, respectively. To transmit/receive authorization information and user ID information.

在傳輸/接收授權資訊以及設定資訊時,可分別經由一個NDEF訊息800的不同NDEF記錄800-1、800-2、......、800-n中的兩個NDEF記錄來傳輸/接收授權資訊以及設定資訊。在此狀況下,可將設定資訊以裝置為單位來劃分,且接著分別經由一個 NDEF訊息800的不同NDEF記錄800-1、800-2、......、800-n來傳輸/接收設定資訊。然而,因為如上所述,設定資訊包括各種資訊(例如,裝置資訊、修改時間資訊、修改場所資訊以及裝置設定資訊),所以根據NFC的特徵,可並非經由一個NDEF訊息800來傳輸/接收所有設定資訊。在此狀況下,可使用多個NDEF訊息800來傳輸/接收授權資訊以及設定資訊。 When transmitting/receiving authorization information and setting information, it is possible to transmit/receive via two NDEF records of different NDEF records 800-1, 800-2, ..., 800-n of one NDEF message 800, respectively. Authorization information and setting information. In this case, the setting information can be divided in units of devices, and then respectively via one Different NDEF records 800-1, 800-2, ..., 800-n of the NDEF message 800 transmit/receive setting information. However, since the setting information includes various information (for example, device information, modification time information, modification location information, and device setting information) as described above, according to the characteristics of the NFC, all settings may not be transmitted/received via one NDEF message 800. News. In this case, a plurality of NDEF messages 800 can be used to transmit/receive authorization information and setting information.

此外,通訊單元110可根據短距離無線通訊、區域網路(local area network;LAN)或網際網路以有線/無線方式接收各種資訊,或可經由通用串列匯流排(universal serial bus;USB)埠接收各種資訊。 In addition, the communication unit 110 can receive various information in a wired/wireless manner according to short-range wireless communication, a local area network (LAN) or the Internet, or can be connected via a universal serial bus (USB).埠 Receive a variety of information.

儲存單元120儲存驅動管理伺服器100所需的各種程式及資料。特定而言,儲存單元120儲存關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊。此處,儲存單元120可儲存對應於個別使用者ID資訊的設定資訊以及對應於群組使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,以使得其彼此有所不同。舉例而言,儲存單元120可如下文表1所示儲存設定資訊以進行映射。 The storage unit 120 stores various programs and materials required to drive the management server 100. In particular, the storage unit 120 stores setting information about at least one device to map it to user ID information. Here, the storage unit 120 may store setting information corresponding to the individual user ID information and setting information corresponding to the group user ID information so as to be different from each other. For example, the storage unit 120 may store the setting information for mapping as shown in Table 1 below.

當使用者使用網域中的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n時,可更新關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊。在此狀況下,儲存單元120可儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊。 When the user uses the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in the domain, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can be updated. ....., 300-n setting information. In this case, the storage unit 120 may store the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information.

在未設定映射至使用者ID資訊的設定資訊的初始狀態中,儲存單元120可將設定資訊儲存為具有預設值。 In an initial state in which the setting information mapped to the user ID information is not set, the storage unit 120 may store the setting information as having a preset value.

儲存單元120可實現為:內建式(built-in)儲存裝置,例如,隨機存取記憶體(random access memory;RAM)、快閃記 憶體、唯讀記憶體(read only memory;ROM)、可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(erasable programmable ROM;EPROM)、電可抹除可程式化唯讀記憶體(electrically erasable programmable ROM;EEPROM)、暫存器、硬碟、可卸除式磁碟以及記憶卡;或可附接/可拆卸儲存裝置,例如,USB記憶體以及唯讀記憶光碟(compact disc-ROM;CD-ROM)。 The storage unit 120 can be implemented as: built-in storage device, for example, random access memory (RAM), flash memory Memory, read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read ROM (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read only memory (electrically erasable programmable ROM; EEPROM), scratchpad, hard drive, removable disk and memory card; or attachable/removable storage device, such as USB memory and compact disc-ROM (CD-ROM) .

控制單元130控制管理伺服器100的整體操作。亦即,控制單元130可控制通訊單元110以及儲存單元120中的至少一者。控制單元130可為中央處理單元(central processing unit;CPU)、微處理器等。 The control unit 130 controls the overall operation of the management server 100. That is, the control unit 130 can control at least one of the communication unit 110 and the storage unit 120. The control unit 130 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, or the like.

特定而言,控制單元130可控制通訊單元110以向使用者終端設備200或至少一個裝置提供通知資訊,所述通知資訊指示所接收的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200或至少一個裝置能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的鑑別資訊。 In particular, the control unit 130 can control the communication unit 110 to provide notification information to the user terminal device 200 or at least one device, the notification information indicating whether the received authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 or at least one device to be saved. The authentication information of the domain managed by the management server 100 is taken.

此外,控制單元130可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,並基於所提取的設定資訊而控制網域中的至少一個裝置。 In addition, the control unit 130 may extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information, and control at least one device in the network domain based on the extracted setting information.

此處,控制單元130可自管理伺服器100中所包括的儲存單元120提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,並基於所提取的設定資訊而控制網域中的至少一個裝置。舉例而言,在第一房間中的TV的狀況下,儲存單元120可儲存所接收的使用者ID資訊,使其映射至頻道資訊、音量資訊、影像品質資訊以及關於最近觀看的TV節目的清單的資訊。在第二房間中的空調的狀況下, 儲存單元120可儲存所接收的使用者ID資訊,使其映射至溫度資訊以及氣流資訊。在盥洗室中的洗衣機的狀況下,儲存單元120可儲存所接收的使用者ID資訊,使其映射至水溫資訊以及洗滌資訊。在此狀況下,控制單元130可提取設定資訊。因此,控制單元130可基於所提取的設定資訊而產生用於控制家庭網域中安裝於第一房間及第二房間以及盥洗室中的TV、空調以及洗衣機的控制訊號。接著,控制單元130可將控制訊號提供至TV、空調以及洗衣機。在此狀況下,TV、空調以及洗衣機中可設定自身的設定資訊,並根據所接收的控制訊號而操作。 Here, the control unit 130 may extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information from the storage unit 120 included in the management server 100, and control at least one device in the network domain based on the extracted setting information. For example, in the case of the TV in the first room, the storage unit 120 may store the received user ID information to map to channel information, volume information, image quality information, and a list of recently viewed TV programs. Information. In the condition of the air conditioner in the second room, The storage unit 120 can store the received user ID information and map it to the temperature information and the airflow information. In the case of the washing machine in the lavatory, the storage unit 120 can store the received user ID information to map to the water temperature information and the washing information. In this case, the control unit 130 can extract the setting information. Therefore, the control unit 130 can generate a control signal for controlling the TV, the air conditioner, and the washing machine installed in the first room and the second room and the washing room in the home network domain based on the extracted setting information. Next, the control unit 130 can provide control signals to the TV, the air conditioner, and the washing machine. In this case, the setting information of the TV, the air conditioner, and the washing machine can be set and operated according to the received control signal.

此外,控制單元130可提取使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊,並基於所提取的設定資訊而控制網域中的至少一個裝置。舉例而言,關於裝置中的設定資訊可儲存於使用者終端設備200中。在此狀況下,控制單元130可接收使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊。接著,控制單元130可基於所接收的設定資訊而產生用於控制所述網域中的至少一個裝置的控制訊號。此外,控制單元130可將控制訊號提供至所述至少一個裝置。在此狀況下,所述至少一個裝置可設定自身的設定資訊,並根據控制訊號而操作。 In addition, the control unit 130 may extract setting information stored in the user terminal device 200 and control at least one device in the network domain based on the extracted setting information. For example, the setting information about the device can be stored in the user terminal device 200. In this case, the control unit 130 can receive the setting information stored in the user terminal device 200. Next, the control unit 130 may generate a control signal for controlling at least one device in the network domain based on the received setting information. Additionally, control unit 130 can provide control signals to the at least one device. In this case, the at least one device can set its own setting information and operate according to the control signal.

此外,控制單元130可提取網域中的至少一個裝置中所儲存的設定資訊,並基於所提取的設定資訊而控制所述至少一個裝置。舉例而言,關於裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的設定資訊可儲存於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n 中。在此狀況下,控制單元130可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n,並從裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中接收映射至使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。接著,控制單元130可基於所接收的設定資訊而產生用於控制所述網域中的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號。接著,控制單元130可將控制訊號提供至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。在此狀況下,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可設定自身的設定資訊,並根據控制訊號而操作。 Further, the control unit 130 may extract setting information stored in at least one device in the network domain, and control the at least one device based on the extracted setting information. For example, setting information about devices (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) may be stored in devices 300-2, 300-3, 300- 4, ..., 300-n in. In this case, the control unit 130 can transmit the user ID information to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n, and the slave devices 300-2, 300-3. , 300-4, ..., 300-n receive setting information mapped to user ID information. Next, the control unit 130 may generate a control signal for controlling the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in the domain based on the received setting information. Next, the control unit 130 can provide control signals to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. In this case, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can set their own setting information and operate according to the control signals.

然而,本例示性實施例不限於此,而裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中可提取對應於所接收的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。在此狀況下,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可基於所提取的設定資訊而操作,而不是在管理伺服器100的控制下操作。 However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited thereto, and the setting information corresponding to the received user ID information may be extracted from the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. . In this case, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can operate based on the extracted setting information instead of operating under the control of the management server 100.

此外,控制單元130可提取連接至管理伺服器100的雲端伺服器400中所儲存的設定資訊,並基於所提取的設定資訊而控制網域中的至少一個裝置。舉例而言,關於至少一個裝置中的設定資訊可儲存於雲端伺服器400中。在此狀況下,控制單元130可將所接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400,並自雲端伺服器400接收映射至使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。接著,控制單元130可基於所接收的設定資訊而產生用於所述網域中的至少一個裝置的控制訊號。接著,控制單元130可將控制訊號提供至所述至少一個裝置。在此狀況下,所述至少一個裝置可設定自身的設 定資訊,並根據控制訊號而操作。 Further, the control unit 130 may extract setting information stored in the cloud server 400 connected to the management server 100, and control at least one device in the network domain based on the extracted setting information. For example, the setting information about the at least one device may be stored in the cloud server 400. In this case, the control unit 130 may transmit the received user ID information to the cloud server 400, and receive setting information mapped to the user ID information from the cloud server 400. Next, the control unit 130 may generate a control signal for at least one device in the domain based on the received setting information. Next, the control unit 130 can provide a control signal to the at least one device. In this case, the at least one device can set its own setting Set the information and operate according to the control signal.

控制單元130可在所接收的使用者ID資訊為個別使用者ID資訊時,提取對應於個別使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,且可在所接收的使用者ID資訊為群組使用者ID資訊時,提取對應於群組使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。舉例而言,在家庭網路的狀況下,個別使用者可單獨使用家庭網路,但使用者的家庭亦可使用家庭網路。在此狀況下,關於屬於個別使用者的至少一個裝置的設定資訊以及關於屬於家庭的至少一個裝置的設定資訊可不同。因此,控制單元130可判定所接收的使用者ID資訊是個別使用者ID資訊或用於家庭的群組使用者ID資訊,且提取對應於判定所接收的使用者ID資訊是個別使用者ID資訊或群組使用者ID資訊的結果的設定資訊。 The control unit 130 may extract setting information corresponding to the individual user ID information when the received user ID information is the individual user ID information, and may be used when the received user ID information is the group user ID information. , extracting setting information corresponding to the group user ID information. For example, in the case of a home network, individual users can use the home network alone, but the user's home can also use the home network. In this case, setting information about at least one device belonging to an individual user and setting information about at least one device belonging to the home may be different. Therefore, the control unit 130 may determine that the received user ID information is individual user ID information or group user ID information for the family, and extract corresponding user ID information corresponding to the determined user ID information. Or setting information of the result of the group user ID information.

此外,控制單元130可基於歷史資訊而將個別使用者的所接收的個別使用者ID資訊判定為群組使用者ID資訊,所述歷史資訊是關於鑑別除對應於所接收的個別使用者ID資訊的使用者之外的先前使用者的授權資訊。舉例而言,在家庭網路的狀況下,一般而言,第二使用者可在第一使用者存取家庭網路之後存取家庭網路。在此狀況下,因為第一使用者在第二使用者存取家庭網路之前存取家庭網路,所以控制單元130可將使用者ID資訊判定為用於第一使用者與第二使用者兩者的群組使用者ID資訊。在更新關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊時,控制單元130可儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至群組使用者ID資訊。 In addition, the control unit 130 may determine, according to the historical information, the received individual user ID information of the individual user as the group user ID information, where the history information is related to the authentication corresponding to the received individual user ID information. Authorization information for previous users other than the user. For example, in the case of a home network, in general, the second user can access the home network after the first user accesses the home network. In this case, since the first user accesses the home network before the second user accesses the home network, the control unit 130 may determine the user ID information as being used for the first user and the second user. Group user ID information for both. When updating the setting information about the at least one device, the control unit 130 may store the updated setting information to map to the group user ID information.

若在基於所接收的個別使用者ID資訊根據對應於所接收的個別使用者ID資訊的設定資訊而控制至少一個裝置之後更新所述設定資訊,且所述設定資訊與對應於群組使用者ID資訊的設定資訊相同時,則控制單元130可將當前使用者環境判定為群組使用者環境。舉例而言,在家庭網路的狀況下,一般而言,雖然存取家庭網路以供家庭使用,但可使用僅一個使用者的授權資訊來存取家庭網路。在此狀況下,雖然已基於提供使用者ID資訊的使用者的設定資訊而設定至少一個裝置,但使用者的家庭成員可根據自身的需要而更新至少一個裝置的設定資訊。在此狀況下,在至少一個裝置設定資訊的經更新的設定資訊與對應於群組使用者ID資訊的群組的設定資訊相同時,控制單元130可將當前使用者環境判定為群組使用者環境。在此狀況下,在更新至少一個裝置的設定資訊時,控制單元130可儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至群組使用者ID資訊。 Updating the setting information after controlling the at least one device based on the received individual user ID information according to the setting information corresponding to the received individual user ID information, and the setting information corresponds to the group user ID When the setting information of the information is the same, the control unit 130 may determine the current user environment as the group user environment. For example, in the case of a home network, in general, although the home network is accessed for home use, only one user's authorization information can be used to access the home network. In this case, although at least one device has been set based on the setting information of the user who provides the user ID information, the family member of the user can update the setting information of at least one device according to his or her own needs. In this case, when the updated setting information of the at least one device setting information is the same as the setting information of the group corresponding to the group user ID information, the control unit 130 may determine the current user environment as the group user. surroundings. In this case, when updating the setting information of the at least one device, the control unit 130 may store the updated setting information to map to the group user ID information.

此外,控制單元130可將對應於網域的使用者設定資訊及使用者ID資訊進行關聯及儲存。舉例而言,在家庭網路的狀況下,在TV、空調、洗衣機以及照明系統包括於家庭網路中時,控制單元130可控制儲存關於家庭網路中的管理伺服器100的網域中所包括的TV、空調、洗衣機以及照明系統的使用者設定資訊,以使得設定資訊映射至使用者ID資訊。 In addition, the control unit 130 can associate and store the user setting information and the user ID information corresponding to the domain. For example, in the case of a home network, when the TV, the air conditioner, the washing machine, and the lighting system are included in the home network, the control unit 130 can control the storage in the domain of the management server 100 in the home network. The user settings information of the TV, air conditioner, washing machine, and lighting system is included to map the setting information to the user ID information.

在更新關於至少一個裝置的使用者設定資訊時,控制單元130可控制儲存經更新的使用者設定資訊,以使得經更新的使 用者設定資訊映射至使用者ID資訊。具體而言,在改變關於至少一個裝置的使用者設定資訊時,管理伺服器100可經由通訊單元110而接收所改變的設定資訊。在此狀況下,控制單元130可控制儲存所改變的設定資訊,以使得所改變的設定資訊映射至使用者ID資訊。 When updating the user setting information about the at least one device, the control unit 130 may control to store the updated user setting information so that the updated The user setting information is mapped to the user ID information. Specifically, when changing user setting information about at least one device, the management server 100 can receive the changed setting information via the communication unit 110. In this case, the control unit 130 may control storing the changed setting information such that the changed setting information is mapped to the user ID information.

此外,在接收到用於獲得關於至少一個裝置的使用者設定資訊的使用者命令時,控制單元130可接收使用者設定資訊,且儲存使用者設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊。 In addition, upon receiving a user command for obtaining user setting information about the at least one device, the control unit 130 may receive the user setting information and store the user setting information to map to the user ID information.

此外,當在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取且鎖定設備300-1鎖定時,控制單元130可在鎖定設備300-1鎖定的時間點接收關於至少一個裝置的使用者設定資訊,且儲存使用者設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊。 Further, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 200 and the lock device 300-1 and the lock device 300-1 is locked, the control unit 130 may receive at least one device at a point of time when the lock device 300-1 is locked. The user sets the information and stores the user setting information to map to the user ID information.

此外,在所接收的使用者ID資訊為個別使用者ID資訊時,控制單元130可儲存使用者設定資訊,使其映射至個別使用者ID資訊。在所接收的使用者ID資訊為群組使用者ID資訊時,控制單元130可儲存使用者設定資訊,使其映射至群組使用者ID資訊。 In addition, when the received user ID information is individual user ID information, the control unit 130 may store the user setting information to map to the individual user ID information. When the received user ID information is the group user ID information, the control unit 130 may store the user setting information to map to the group user ID information.

如下文參照圖17至圖19所述,控制單元130可控制在管理伺服器100中所包括的儲存單元120中儲存對應於一網域的使用者設定資訊以及使用者ID資訊。 As described below with reference to FIG. 17 to FIG. 19, the control unit 130 can control the storage of the user setting information corresponding to a domain and the user ID information in the storage unit 120 included in the management server 100.

如下文參照圖20及圖21所述,控制單元130亦可控制關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而儲存對應於一網域 的使用者設定資訊以及使用者ID資訊。 As described below with reference to FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the control unit 130 may also control the storage of the corresponding domain with respect to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. User setting information and user ID information.

如下文參照圖22所述,控制單元130亦可控制關於使用者終端設備200而儲存對應於一網域的使用者設定資訊以及使用者ID資訊。 As described below with reference to FIG. 22, the control unit 130 may also control user setting information and user ID information corresponding to a domain with respect to the user terminal device 200.

控制單元130可包括中央處理單元(CPU)、儲存控制程式的ROM以及用以記憶輸入資料或作為工作相關記憶體區域的RAM。CPU、ROM以及RAM可經由內部匯流排而連接。 The control unit 130 may include a central processing unit (CPU), a ROM that stores the control program, and a RAM for storing input data or as a work-related memory area. The CPU, ROM, and RAM can be connected via an internal bus bar.

管理伺服器100可更包括顯示單元(未圖示)。顯示單元顯示所提取的設定資訊以及使用者ID資訊。具體而言,在TV的狀況下,顯示單元可顯示頻道資訊、音量資訊、影像品質資訊及關於最近觀看的TV節目的清單的資訊,以及使用者ID資訊。在空調的狀況下,顯示單元可顯示溫度資訊、氣流資訊等以及使用者ID資訊。 The management server 100 may further include a display unit (not shown). The display unit displays the extracted setting information and user ID information. Specifically, in the case of the TV, the display unit can display channel information, volume information, image quality information, and information about a list of recently viewed TV programs, and user ID information. In the case of an air conditioner, the display unit can display temperature information, airflow information, and the like, and user ID information.

顯示單元可實現為以下各者中的至少一者:液晶顯示器(liquid crystal display)、薄膜電晶體(thin film transistor;TFT)-LCD、有機發光二極體(organic light emitting diode;OLED)、可撓性顯示器以及三維(three-dimensional;3D)顯示器。 The display unit can be implemented as at least one of a liquid crystal display, a thin film transistor (TFT)-LCD, an organic light emitting diode (OLED), or Flexible display and three-dimensional (3D) display.

根據上文例示性實施例的管理伺服器100可提取對應於所接收的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊,且可因此容易對自身的網域中的至少一個裝置執行環境設定。 The management server 100 according to the above exemplary embodiment may extract setting information corresponding to the received user ID information, and thus may easily perform environment setting for at least one device in its own domain.

圖4為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的使用者終端設備200的方塊圖。請參照圖4,使用者終端設備200包括通訊單元 210、儲存單元220以及控制單元230。 FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a user terminal device 200 in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 4, the user terminal device 200 includes a communication unit. 210. The storage unit 220 and the control unit 230.

通訊單元210將使用者終端設備200連接至外部裝置。特定而言,通訊單元210可傳輸所提取的設定資訊。具體而言,在使用者終端設備200基於讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊而存取所述網域時,通訊單元210可傳輸自使用者終端設備200中所儲存的設定資訊提取的設定資訊。 The communication unit 210 connects the user terminal device 200 to an external device. In particular, the communication unit 210 can transmit the extracted setting information. Specifically, when the user terminal device 200 accesses the domain based on the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100, the communication unit 210 can transmit the user terminal. The setting information extracted by the setting information stored in the device 200.

可藉由使用者終端設備200與管理伺服器100之間的短距離存取來傳輸所提取的設定資訊。另外,可藉由使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間的短距離存取來傳輸所提取的設定資訊。另外,可藉由使用者終端設備200與裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的其中之一者之間的短距離存取來傳輸所提取的設定資訊。下文將參照圖8至圖10描述此情形。 The extracted setting information can be transmitted by short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the management server 100. In addition, the extracted setting information can be transmitted by short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1. In addition, the extracted may be transmitted by short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. Setting information. This case will be described below with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

在家庭網路的狀況下,所提取的設定資訊可包括頻道資訊、音量資訊、影像品質資訊以及關於最近觀看的TV節目的清單的資訊(在第一房間中的TV的狀況下),可包括溫度資訊、氣流資訊(在第二房間中的空調的狀況下),且可包括水溫資訊以及洗滌資訊(在盥洗室中的洗衣機的狀況下)。因此,在管理伺服器100接收所提取的設定資訊時,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而產生用於控制家庭網域中安裝於第一房間、第二房間以及盥洗室中的TV、空調以及洗衣機的控制訊號。在此狀況下,TV、空調以及洗衣機中可設定自身的設定資訊,並根據控制訊號而操 作。 In the case of the home network, the extracted setting information may include channel information, volume information, image quality information, and information about a list of recently watched TV programs (in the case of the TV in the first room), which may include Temperature information, airflow information (in the case of air conditioning in the second room), and may include water temperature information and washing information (in the case of a washing machine in the bathroom). Therefore, when the management server 100 receives the extracted setting information, the management server 100 may generate a TV for controlling the home network installed in the first room, the second room, and the bathroom based on the extracted setting information. Control signals for air conditioners and washing machines. In this case, TV, air conditioner, and washing machine can set their own setting information and operate according to the control signal. Work.

儲存單元220儲存驅動使用者終端設備200所需的各種程式及資料。特定而言,儲存單元220可儲存關於至少一個裝置的使用者ID資訊、授權資訊以及設定資訊。控制單元230控制使用者終端設備200的整體操作。具體而言,控制單元230可控制通訊單元210以及儲存單元220中的至少一者。 The storage unit 220 stores various programs and materials required to drive the user terminal device 200. In particular, the storage unit 220 can store user ID information, authorization information, and setting information about at least one device. The control unit 230 controls the overall operation of the user terminal device 200. Specifically, the control unit 230 can control at least one of the communication unit 210 and the storage unit 220.

特定而言,控制單元230可允許管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊來控制網域中的至少一個裝置。 In particular, control unit 230 may allow management server 100 to control at least one device in the network domain based on the extracted settings information.

在經由通訊單元210而自管理伺服器100接收關於至少一個裝置的經更新的設定資訊時,控制單元230可控制儲存單元220儲存經更新的設定資訊。 Upon receiving updated setting information regarding the at least one device from the management server 100 via the communication unit 210, the control unit 230 may control the storage unit 220 to store the updated setting information.

在經由通訊單元210而自至少一個裝置接收關於至少一個裝置的經更新的設定資訊時,控制單元230可控制儲存單元220儲存經更新的設定資訊。 When receiving updated setting information regarding at least one device from at least one device via the communication unit 210, the control unit 230 may control the storage unit 220 to store the updated setting information.

控制單元230可控制使用者終端設備200自管理伺服器100所管理的網域撤回或與所述網域斷開,或在接收到指示接收設定資訊的使用者命令時接收並儲存設定資訊。舉例而言,作為使用者終端設備200自管理伺服器100所管理的網域撤回的狀況,使用者終端設備200可藉由在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取而對鎖定設備300-1進行鎖定。若使用者終端設備200自管理伺服器100所管理的網域撤回,則管理伺服器100可向使用者終端設備200提供就此情形進行通知的通知 訊號。 The control unit 230 can control the user terminal device 200 to withdraw from the domain managed by the management server 100 or disconnect from the domain, or receive and store the setting information upon receiving a user command indicating receipt of the setting information. For example, as the user terminal device 200 withdraws from the domain managed by the management server 100, the user terminal device 200 can perform short-distance storage between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1. The locking device 300-1 is locked. If the user terminal device 200 is withdrawn from the domain managed by the management server 100, the management server 100 can provide the user terminal device 200 with a notification for notifying the situation. Signal.

根據上文例示性實施例的使用者終端設備可傳輸所提取的設定資訊,且因此容易對管理伺服器的網域中所包括的至少一個裝置執行環境設定。 The user terminal device according to the above exemplary embodiment can transmit the extracted setting information, and thus it is easy to perform environment setting on at least one device included in the management server's network domain.

圖5至圖7為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由管理伺服器100執行。 5 through 7 illustrate storing storage setting information and controlling at least one device based on setting information (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A timing diagram of the method of 300-n), which is performed by the management server 100.

請參照圖5,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S501)。 Referring to FIG. 5, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S501).

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否是讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S502)。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 is the authorization information for enabling the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100. (Operation S502).

接著,若將授權資訊鑑別讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1釋放自身的鎖定狀態(操作S503)。接著,鎖定設備300-1將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S504)。 Next, if the authorization information authentication enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 releases its own lock state (operation S503). Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 (operation S504).

在此狀況下,管理伺服器100提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S505)。接著,管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控 制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S506)。 In this case, the management server 100 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S505). Next, the management server 100 controls the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the extracted setting information. The signal is transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S506).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S507)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S507).

雖然在上文中參照圖5而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但在一些狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時釋放自身的鎖定狀態。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 5, in some cases, the locking device 300-1 may be used only to transmit the authorization information and the user ID information to the management server 100. Medium. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 releases its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated.

請參照圖6,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取管理伺服器100而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S601)。 Referring to FIG. 6, the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 by the short-distance access management server 100 (operation S601).

接著,管理伺服器100提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S602)。管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S603)。 Next, the management server 100 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S602). The management server 100 transmits control signals for the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the devices 300-2, 300 based on the extracted setting information. 3. 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S603).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S604)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S604).

請參照圖7,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)(操作S701)。 Referring to FIG. 7, the user terminal device 200 transmits user ID information to at least one device by short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. (for example, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) (operation S701).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S702)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the user ID information to the management server 100 (operation S702).

接著,管理伺服器100提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S703)。管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S704)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S705)。 Next, the management server 100 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S703). The management server 100 transmits control signals for the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the devices 300-2, 300 based on the extracted setting information. 3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S704). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S705).

圖8至圖10為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由使用者終端設備200執行。 8 through 10 illustrate storage of setting information and control of at least one device based on setting information (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A timing diagram of the method of 300-n), which is performed by the user terminal device 200.

請參照圖8,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及設定資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S801)。 Referring to FIG. 8, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the setting information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S801).

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否是讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S802)。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 is the authorization information for enabling the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100. (Operation S802).

若鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1釋放鎖定狀態(操作S803)。接著,鎖定設備300-1將所接收的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S804)。 If the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the locking device 300-1 releases the locked state (operation S803). Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the received setting information to the management server 100 (operation S804).

接著,管理伺服器100基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置 300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S805)。 Then, the management server 100 will be used to control the device based on the setting information. The control signals of 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (Operation S805).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S806)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S806).

雖然在上文中參照圖8而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時釋放自身的鎖定狀態。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 8, the locking device 300-1 may be used only as a medium by which the authorization information and the user ID information are transmitted to the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 releases its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated.

請參照圖9,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取管理伺服器100而將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S901)。 Referring to FIG. 9, the user terminal device 200 transmits the setting information to the management server 100 by the short-distance access management server 100 (operation S901).

接著,管理伺服器100基於設定資訊而將用於控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S902)。 Next, the management server 100 transmits a control signal for controlling at least one device (for example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) to the device based on the setting information. 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S902).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S903)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S903).

請參照圖10,使用者終端設備200藉由直接短距離存取裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而將設定資訊傳輸至至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)(操作S1001)。 Referring to FIG. 10, the user terminal device 200 transmits setting information to at least one device by direct short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n ( For example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) (operation S1001).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1002)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the setting information to the management server 100 (operation S1002).

接著,管理伺服器100基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1003)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S1004)。 Next, the management server 100 transmits control signals for the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the devices 300-2, 300-3 based on the setting information. , 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1003). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S1004).

雖然在上文中參照圖10而將裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n描述為在管理伺服器100的控制下操作,但裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可直接基於經由短距離存取而接收的設定資訊來操作。舉例而言,若裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n為TV,且藉由短距離存取使用者終端設備200而接收TV頻道資訊以及TV音量資訊,則裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可直接基於設定資訊來設定。 Although the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are described above as operating under the control of the management server 100 with reference to FIG. 10, the device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be operated directly based on setting information received via short-distance access. For example, if the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are TVs, and receive the TV channel information and the TV by short-distance access to the user terminal device 200 The volume information, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be set directly based on the setting information.

圖11為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由鎖定設備300-1執行。 11 is a diagram illustrating storage of setting information and controlling at least one device based on setting information (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention). A timing diagram of the method of -n), which is performed by the locking device 300-1.

請參照圖11,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S1101)。 Referring to FIG. 11, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S1101).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S1102)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 enables the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S1102). .

接著,若鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1釋放自身的鎖定狀態(操作S1103)。接著,鎖定設備300-1提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S1104)。 Next, if the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the locking device 300-1 releases its own locked state (operation S1103). Next, the locking device 300-1 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S1104).

接著,鎖定設備300-1基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1105)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the control signals for the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the device 300-2 based on the extracted setting information. , 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1105).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S1106)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S1106).

雖然在上文中參照圖11而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時釋放自身的鎖定狀態。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 11, the locking device 300-1 may be used only as a medium by which the authorization information and the user ID information are transmitted to the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 releases its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated.

圖12至圖14為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的儲存設定資訊並基於設定資訊來操作的方法的時序圖,所述方法是由至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)執行。 12 through 14 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of storing setting information and operating based on setting information, the method being performed by at least one device (eg, devices 300-2, 300, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention). -3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) Execution.

請參照圖12,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S1201)。 Referring to FIG. 12, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S1201).

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200 接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S1202)。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 is authenticated from the user terminal device 200. Whether the received authorization information of the user terminal device 200 enables the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S1202).

若鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1釋放自身的鎖定狀態(操作S1203)。接著,鎖定設備300-1將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1204)。接著,管理伺服器100將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1205)。 If the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the locking device 300-1 releases its own locked state (operation S1203). Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 (operation S1204). Next, the management server 100 transmits the user ID information to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1205).

接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S1206)。接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中基於所提取的設定資訊而產生用於控制各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的控制訊號(操作S1207)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中根據控制訊號而操作(操作S1208)。 Next, setting information corresponding to the user ID information is extracted from each of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1206). Next, each device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is generated based on the extracted setting information for controlling each device 300-2, 300-3, 300- 4, ..., control signal in 300-n (operation S1207). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals (operation S1208).

雖然在上文中參照圖12而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時釋放自身的鎖定狀態。此外,在鎖定設備300-1與裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n形成網路或充當伺服器時,鎖定設備300-1可直接將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n,而並無管理伺服器100充當媒介。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 12, the locking device 300-1 may be used only as a medium by which the authorization information and the user ID information are transmitted to the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 releases its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated. Further, when the locking device 300-1 and the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n form a network or act as a server, the locking device 300-1 can be used directly The ID information is transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n without the management server 100 acting as a medium.

請參照圖13,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取管理伺服器100而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1301)。 Referring to FIG. 13, the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 by the short-distance access management server 100 (operation S1301).

接著,管理伺服器100將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1302)。 Next, the management server 100 transmits the user ID information to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1302).

接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S1303)。接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中基於所提取的設定資訊而產生用於控制各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的控制訊號(操作S1304)。接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中根據控制訊號而操作(操作S1305)。 Next, setting information corresponding to the user ID information is extracted from each of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1303). Next, each device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is generated based on the extracted setting information for controlling each device 300-2, 300-3, 300- 4, ..., control signal in 300-n (operation S1304). Next, each of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operates in accordance with the control signal (operation S1305).

請參照圖14,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1401)。 Referring to FIG. 14, the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the device 300 by the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. 2. 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1401).

接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S1402)。接著,各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中基於所提取的設定資訊而產生用於控制各裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中的控制訊號(操作S1403)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n中根據控制訊號而操作(操作S1404)。 Next, setting information corresponding to the user ID information is extracted from each of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1402). Next, each device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is generated based on the extracted setting information for controlling each device 300-2, 300-3, 300- 4, ..., control signal in 300-n (operation S1403). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals (operation S1404).

圖15為根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的藉由使用雲端伺服器400來控制至少一個裝置的時序圖。請參照圖15,使用者 終端設備200將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400(操作S1501)。可藉由短距離存取連接至雲端伺服器400的設備而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。舉例而言,將描述辦公室網路。在辦公室中,可安裝能夠短距離存取使用者終端設備200的設備。在此狀況下,使用者可藉由允許使用者終端設備200存取此設備來將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。或者,使用者終端設備200可經由第3代(3-generation;3G)或第4代(4G)行動電信網路或WiFi而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。接著,雲端伺服器400提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S1502)。接著,雲端伺服器400將所提取的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1503)。 FIG. 15 is a timing diagram of controlling at least one device by using a cloud server 400, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to Figure 15, the user The terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the cloud server 400 (operation S1501). The user ID information can be transmitted to the cloud server 400 by short-distance access to the device connected to the cloud server 400. For example, an office network will be described. In the office, a device capable of accessing the user terminal device 200 in a short distance can be installed. In this case, the user can transmit the user ID information to the cloud server 400 by allowing the user terminal device 200 to access the device. Alternatively, the user terminal device 200 can transmit user ID information to the cloud server 400 via a 3rd generation (3 generation) or 4th generation (4G) mobile telecommunications network or WiFi. Next, the cloud server 400 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S1502). Next, the cloud server 400 transmits the extracted setting information to the management server 100 (operation S1503).

接著,管理伺服器100可基於所接收的設定資訊而傳輸用於控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的控制訊號(操作S1504)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n根據自管理伺服器100接收的控制訊號而操作(操作S1505)。 Then, the management server 100 can transmit control for controlling at least one device (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) based on the received setting information. Signal (operation S1504). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate in accordance with the control signals received from the management server 100 (operation S1505).

雖然在上文中參照圖15而將裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n描述為自管理伺服器100接收控制訊號,但雲端伺服器400可直接將設定資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 Although the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are described above as receiving control signals from the management server 100 with reference to FIG. 15, the cloud server 400 can directly The setting information is transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

雖然圖15說明使用者終端設備200將使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400的狀況,但例示性實施例不限於此。在使用 者終端設備200短距離存取管理伺服器100時,管理伺服器100可將自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。另外,在使用者終端設備200短距離存取鎖定設備300-1時,鎖定設備300-1可將自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。另外,在使用者終端設備200短距離存取裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可將自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者ID資訊傳輸至雲端伺服器400。 Although FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the cloud server 400, the exemplary embodiment is not limited thereto. In use When the terminal device 200 accesses the management server 100 for a short distance, the management server 100 can transmit the user ID information received from the user terminal device 200 to the cloud server 400. In addition, when the user terminal device 200 accesses the locking device 300-1 for a short distance, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the user ID information received from the user terminal device 200 to the cloud server 400. In addition, when the user terminal device 200 short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can transmit the user ID information received from the user terminal device 200 to the cloud server 400.

圖16為說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的基於相關於設定資訊的環球資源定位器(universal resource locator;URL)資訊來控制連接至外部伺服器500的至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的方法的時序圖。外部伺服器500為安裝在由管理伺服器100管理的網域外部的物件伺服器,獨立於位於使用者網域內且控制使用者網域中的裝置的管理伺服器100。類似於管理伺服器100,外部伺服器500可連接至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n,且可管理裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 16 is a diagram illustrating at least one device (eg, device 300) that is connected to an external server 500 based on global resource locator (URL) information related to setting information, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Timing diagram of the method of -2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n). The external server 500 is an object server installed outside the domain managed by the management server 100, independent of the management server 100 located in the user's domain and controlling devices in the user's domain. Similar to the management server 100, the external server 500 can be connected to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n, and the manageable devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

請參照圖16,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取外部伺服器500而將關於管理伺服器100中所儲存的設定資訊的位址的URL資訊傳輸至外部伺服器500(操作S1601)。 Referring to FIG. 16, the user terminal device 200 transmits URL information about the address of the setting information stored in the management server 100 to the external server 500 by short-distance access to the external server 500 (operation S1601).

接著,外部伺服器500基於URL資訊而請求存取管理伺服器100(操作S1602)。 Next, the external server 500 requests access to the management server 100 based on the URL information (operation S1602).

接著,管理伺服器100判定是否將允許外部伺服器500存取管理伺服器100,且在允許外部伺服器500存取時,向外部伺服器500提供許可(操作S1603)。接著,外部伺服器500基於URL資訊而接收管理伺服器100中所儲存的設定資訊(操作S1604)。接著,外部伺服器500基於設定資訊而產生用於控制連接至外部伺服器500的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的控制訊號(操作S1605)。接著,外部伺服器500藉由使用控制訊號而控制連接至外部伺服器500的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1606)。 Next, the management server 100 determines whether the external server 500 is allowed to access the management server 100, and when the external server 500 is allowed to access, provides permission to the external server 500 (operation S1603). Next, the external server 500 receives the setting information stored in the management server 100 based on the URL information (operation S1604). Next, the external server 500 generates a control signal for controlling the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n connected to the external server 500 based on the setting information (operation S1605) ). Next, the external server 500 controls the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n connected to the external server 500 by using the control signals (operation S1606).

因此,關於使用者網域中所包括的裝置的設定資訊可應用於外部網域中所包括的裝置。 Therefore, the setting information about the devices included in the user's domain can be applied to the devices included in the external network.

圖17至圖19為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的將在使用至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)時更新的設定資訊儲存於管理伺服器100中的方法的時序圖。在圖17至圖19中,短距離存取可為在如圖5至圖16而執行於主要短距離存取之後執行的次要短距離存取。 17-19 are diagrams illustrating the use of at least one device (eg, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. A timing chart of the method in which the update information is stored in the management server 100. In FIGS. 17 to 19, the short-distance access may be a secondary short-distance access performed after performing the main short-distance access as shown in FIGS. 5 to 16.

請參照圖17,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S1701)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1702)。此處,每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 17, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n update its own setting information (operation S1701). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S1702). Here, the updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1703)。 Next, the management server 100 monitors the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the updated setting information (operation S1703).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S1704)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S1704).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否是讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S1705)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 is the authorization information for enabling the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S1705). ).

接著,在鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,鎖定設備300-1設定自身的鎖定狀態(操作S1706)。接著,鎖定設備300-1向管理伺服器100通知鎖定狀態得以設定(操作S1707)。 Next, when the authentication authority information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 sets its own lock state (operation S1706). Next, the lock device 300-1 notifies the management server 100 that the lock state is set (operation S1707).

接著,管理伺服器100儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S1708)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the management server 100 stores the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S1708). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

雖然在上文中參照圖17而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時設定自身的鎖定狀態。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 17, the locking device 300-1 may be used only as a medium by which the authorization information and the setting information are transmitted to the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 sets its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated.

請參照圖18,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自 身的設定資訊(操作S1801)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1802)。在此狀況下,每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 18, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n updated from Setting information of the body (operation S1801). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S1802). In this case, the updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1803)。 Next, the management server 100 monitors the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the updated setting information (operation S1803).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取管理伺服器100而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1804)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 by the short-distance access management server 100 (operation S1804).

接著,管理伺服器100儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S1805)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the management server 100 stores the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S1805). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

請參照圖19,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S1901)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1902)。每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 19, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n update its own setting information (operation S1901). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S1902). The updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1903)。 Next, the management server 100 monitors the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the updated setting information (operation S1903).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而將使用者ID資訊傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S1904)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、 300-4、......、300-n將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S1905)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the user ID information to the devices 300-2, 300 by the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n. -3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S1904). Next, devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmits the user ID information to the management server 100 (operation S1905).

接著,管理伺服器100儲存最近更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S1906)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the management server 100 stores the most recently updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S1906). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

圖20至圖22為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的將在使用至少一個裝置(例如,300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)時更新的設定資訊儲存於各種設備中的方法的時序圖。在圖20至圖22中,短距離存取可為在如圖5至圖16於執行主要短距離存取之後執行的次要短距離存取。 20 through 22 illustrate a manner in which at least one device (e.g., 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) will be used in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. A timing diagram of the method of updating the set information stored in various devices. In Figures 20-22, the short range access may be a secondary short range access performed after performing the primary short range access as in Figures 5-16.

請參照圖20,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S2001)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S2002)。每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 20, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n update its own setting information (operation S2001). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S2002). The updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S2003)。 Next, the management server 100 monitors the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the updated setting information (operation S2003).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S2004)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S2004).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的 使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S2005)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies the one received from the user terminal device 200. Whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 enables the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S2005).

接著,在鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,鎖定設備300-1設定自身的鎖定狀態(操作S2006)。接著,鎖定設備300-1向管理伺服器100通知鎖定狀態得以設定(操作S2007)。 Next, when the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 sets its own lock state (operation S2006). Next, the lock device 300-1 notifies the management server 100 that the lock state is set (operation S2007).

接著,管理伺服器100將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S2008)。接著,鎖定設備300-1儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S2009)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the management server 100 transmits the updated setting information to the locking device 300-1 (operation S2008). Next, the locking device 300-1 stores the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S2009). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

請參照圖21,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S2101)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S2102)。每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 21, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n update its own setting information (operation S2101). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S2102). The updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S2103)。 Next, the management server 100 monitors the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the updated setting information (operation S2103).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S2104)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S2104).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S2105)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 enables the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S2105). .

接著、在鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,鎖定設備300-1設定自身的鎖定狀態(操作S2106)。接著,鎖定設備300-1向管理伺服器100通知鎖定狀態得以設定(操作S2107)。 Next, when the authentication authorization information allows the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 sets its own lock state (operation S2106). Next, the lock device 300-1 notifies the management server 100 that the lock state is set (operation S2107).

接著,管理伺服器100將指示裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n儲存經更新的設定資訊使其映射至使用者ID資訊的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S2108)。 Then, the management server 100 stores the updated setting information by the instructing devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to transmit the control signal mapped to the user ID information to The devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S2108).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S2109)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n store the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S2109). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

請參照圖22,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S2201)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S2202)。每當更新設定資訊,便可將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 22, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, .. ...., 300-n update its own setting information (operation S2201). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S2202). The updated setting information can be transmitted to the management server 100 whenever the setting information is updated.

接著,管理伺服器100基於經更新的設定資訊而監視裝 置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S2203)。 Then, the management server 100 monitors the device based on the updated setting information. Set 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S2203).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S2204)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S2204).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是否讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S2205)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies whether the authorization information of the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 enables the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S2205). .

接著,在鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域時,鎖定設備300-1設定自身的鎖定狀態(操作S2206)。接著,鎖定設備300-1向管理伺服器100通知鎖定狀態得以設定(操作S2207)。 Next, when the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 sets its own lock state (operation S2206). Next, the lock device 300-1 notifies the management server 100 that the lock state is set (operation S2207).

接著,管理伺服器100將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S2208)。接著,鎖定設備300-1將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至使用者終端設備200(操作S2209)。 Next, the management server 100 transmits the updated setting information to the locking device 300-1 (operation S2208). Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the updated setting information to the user terminal device 200 (operation S2209).

接著,使用者終端設備200儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S2210)。因此,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的經更新的設定資訊可與使用者ID相關聯。 Next, the user terminal device 200 stores the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S2210). Thus, the updated setting information for devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can be associated with the user ID.

將在使用裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n時更新的設定資訊儲存於各種設備中的方法亦可應用於上文參照圖18及圖19所述的狀況。 The method of storing the setting information updated when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used in various devices can also be applied to the above with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. The stated condition.

經更新的設定資訊可儲存於使用者終端設備200中。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可藉由短距離存取鎖定設備 300-1、管理伺服器100或裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n而接收經更新的設定資訊。 The updated setting information can be stored in the user terminal device 200. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can access the locking device by short-distance access. 300-1. The management server 100 or the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n receive the updated setting information.

圖23至圖25為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的控制家庭網域管理系統的方法的圖式。請參照圖23(a),為了進入家中,使用者可在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可將授權資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1以釋放鎖定設備300-1的鎖定狀態,且鎖定設備300-1可因此釋放自身的鎖定狀態。 23 through 25 are diagrams illustrating a method of controlling a home network domain management system, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 23(a), in order to enter the home, the user can perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the authorization information to the lock device 300-1 to release the lock state of the lock device 300-1, and the lock device 300-1 can thus release its own lock state.

此外,使用者終端設備200經由短距離存取來傳輸用於基於設定資訊而操作家中至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4)的使用者ID資訊。 Further, the user terminal device 200 transmits user ID information for operating at least one device (for example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4) of the home based on the setting information via short-distance access.

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制家中裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the user ID information to the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. Further, the management server 100 can transmit control signals for controlling the home devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於家中裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可經由短距離存取而傳輸關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的授權資訊以及設定資訊。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about the home devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the devices 300-2, 300-3 via short-distance access. , 300-4 authorization information and setting information.

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置 300-2、300-3、300-4的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the setting information to the management server 100. Then, the management server 100 will be used to control the device based on the setting information. The control signals of 300-2, 300-3, and 300-4 are transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, and 300-4.

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,家中裝置300-2、300-3、300-4可如圖23(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,在TV的狀況下,設定資訊可為用於組態TV的組態資訊:TV可處於「開」,TV頻道可切換至「CH11」,且音量可受到控制。在洗衣機的狀況下,設定資訊可為用於組態洗衣機的組態資訊:洗衣機可處於「開」,且洗滌可開始。在空調的狀況下,設定資訊可為用於組態空調的組態資訊:空調可處於「開」,且溫度及氣流可進行調整。 When the control signals are transmitted as described above, the home devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can operate based on the extracted setting information as illustrated in FIG. 23(b). For example, in the case of a TV, the setting information can be configuration information for configuring the TV: the TV can be "on", the TV channel can be switched to "CH11", and the volume can be controlled. In the case of a washing machine, the setting information can be configuration information for configuring the washing machine: the washing machine can be "on" and washing can begin. In the case of air conditioning, the setting information can be configured information for configuring the air conditioner: the air conditioner can be "on" and the temperature and airflow can be adjusted.

雖然在上文中參照圖23而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時設定自身的鎖定狀態。若鎖定設備300-1充當伺服器,則可省略管理伺服器100。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 23, the locking device 300-1 may be used only as a medium by which the authorization information and the user ID information are transmitted to the management server 100. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 sets its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated. If the locking device 300-1 acts as a server, the management server 100 can be omitted.

請參照圖24(a),使用者進入使用者家中,且可在使用者終端設備200與家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4之間提供短距離存取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可將用於基於設定資訊而操作家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的使用者ID資訊傳輸至至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4中的短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。 Referring to FIG. 24(a), the user enters the user's home and can provide short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the home. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can transmit user ID information for operating at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the home based on the setting information to the at least one device 300-2, 300- 3. Devices 300-2, 300-3, and 300-4 for short-distance access in 300-4.

在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置可將使用者ID資訊傳輸 至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊而將控制訊號傳輸至短距離存取的裝置。 In this case, the short-distance access device can transmit the user ID information. To the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. Further, the management server 100 transmits the control signal to the device for short-distance access based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可經由短距離存取而將關於至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊傳輸至短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the home, the user terminal device 200 can access the at least one device 300-2 via short-distance access. The setting information of 300-3, 300-4 is transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, and 300-4 for short-distance access.

在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4可將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100自設定資訊提取對應於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊,且將用於基於設定資訊而操作裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。然而,在一些狀況下,可自接收自短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊偵測所需的一段設定資訊。在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4可基於所偵測的設定資訊而操作,而不是在管理伺服器100的控制下操作。 In this case, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can transmit the setting information to the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 extracts setting information corresponding to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 from the setting information, and will operate the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 based on the setting information. Control signals are transmitted to devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4. However, in some cases, a set of setting information may be detected from the setting information of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 received from the short-distance access. In this case, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can operate based on the detected setting information instead of operating under the control of the management server 100.

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4可如圖24(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,在TV的狀況下,TV處於「開」且TV頻道調諧至「CH11」,且音量可受到控制。 When the control signal is transmitted as described above, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can operate based on the extracted setting information as illustrated in FIG. 24(b). For example, in the case of a TV, the TV is "on" and the TV channel is tuned to "CH11", and the volume can be controlled.

請參照圖25(a),使用者可進入使用者家中,且在使用者終端設備200與管理伺服器100之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況 下,使用者終端設備200可將用於基於設定資訊而控制家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 25(a), the user can enter the user's home and perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the management server 100. In this situation Next, the user terminal device 200 can transmit user ID information for controlling at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the home based on the setting information to the management server 100.

在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而將控制訊號傳輸至短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4。 In this case, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. Further, the management server 100 can transmit the control signals to the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可經由短距離存取而將關於家中至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 in the home, the user terminal device 200 can access at least one device 300 in the home via short-distance access. 2. The setting information of 300-3, 300-4 is transmitted to the management server 100.

在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置300-2、300-3、300-4的控制訊號傳輸至至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4)。 In this case, the management server 100 can transmit the control signals for the control devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 to at least one device (for example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, based on the setting information). 300-4).

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,家中裝置300-2、300-3、300-4可如圖24(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,在TV的狀況下,TV可處於「開」,TV頻道可切換至「CH11」,且音量可受到控制。在洗衣機的狀況下,洗衣機可處於「開」,且洗滌可開始。在空調的狀況下,空調可處於「開」,且溫度及氣流可進行調整。 When the control signal is transmitted as described above, the home devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4 can operate based on the extracted setting information as illustrated in FIG. 24(b). For example, in the case of a TV, the TV can be "on", the TV channel can be switched to "CH11", and the volume can be controlled. In the case of a washing machine, the washing machine can be "on" and washing can begin. In the case of air conditioning, the air conditioner can be "on" and the temperature and airflow can be adjusted.

圖26至圖28為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的汽車網域管理系統的圖式。請參照圖26(a),為了進入汽車,使用者可在使用者終端設備200與鎖定設備300-1之間執行短距離存 取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可將用於釋放鎖定設備300-1的鎖定狀態的授權資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1,且鎖定設備300-1可因此釋放自身的鎖定狀態。 26 through 28 are diagrams illustrating a vehicle domain management system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 26(a), in order to enter the car, the user can perform short-distance storage between the user terminal device 200 and the locking device 300-1. take. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can transmit the authorization information for releasing the lock state of the lock device 300-1 to the lock device 300-1, and the lock device 300-1 can thus release its own lock state.

此外,使用者終端設備200可執行短距離存取以將用於基於設定資訊而操作汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置的使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。 Further, the user terminal device 200 can perform short-distance access to transmit user ID information for operating at least one device installed in the car based on the setting information to the locking device 300-1.

在此狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置的控制訊號傳輸至至少一個裝置。 In this case, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the user ID information to the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. Further, the management server 100 may transmit a control signal for controlling at least one device installed in the car to the at least one device based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可執行短距離存取以將關於汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置的授權資訊以及設定資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about at least one device installed in the car, the user terminal device 200 may perform short-distance access to set authorization information and settings regarding at least one device installed in the car. The information is transmitted to the locking device 300-1.

接著,鎖定設備300-1可將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置的控制訊號傳輸至至少一個裝置。 Next, the locking device 300-1 can transmit the setting information to the management server 100. Then, the management server 100 can transmit a control signal for controlling the device to at least one device based on the setting information.

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置可如圖26(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,設定資訊可包括方向盤或駕駛員的座椅的組態,且控制訊號可控制方向盤的高度,座椅的椅背的傾斜度、座椅的高度及位置 可進行調整。 When the control signal is transmitted as described above, at least one of the devices installed in the car can operate based on the extracted setting information as illustrated in Fig. 26(b). For example, the setting information may include the configuration of the steering wheel or the driver's seat, and the control signal controls the height of the steering wheel, the inclination of the seat back of the seat, the height and position of the seat. Can be adjusted.

雖然在上文中參照圖26而將鎖定設備300-1描述為鑑別授權資訊,但在一些狀況下,鎖定設備300-1可僅用作藉以將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100的媒介。在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可鑑別授權資訊,且控制鎖定設備300-1在授權資訊得以鑑別時設定自身的鎖定狀態。若鎖定設備300-1充當伺服器,則可省略管理伺服器100。 Although the locking device 300-1 is described above as the authentication authorization information with reference to FIG. 26, in some cases, the locking device 300-1 may be used only to transmit the authorization information and the user ID information to the management server 100. Medium. In this case, the management server 100 can authenticate the authorization information, and the control locking device 300-1 sets its own lock state when the authorization information is authenticated. If the locking device 300-1 acts as a server, the management server 100 can be omitted.

請參照圖27(a),使用者可進入汽車,且可在使用者終端設備200與汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可將用於基於設定資訊而操作汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的使用者ID資訊傳輸至短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 Referring to FIG. 27(a), the user can enter the car and can be at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ... installed in the user terminal device 200 and the car. Perform short-distance access between 300-n. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can operate the at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n installed in the car based on the setting information. The user ID information is transmitted to the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而將控制訊號傳輸至短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 In this case, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can transmit the user ID information to the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. In addition, the management server 100 can transmit the control signals to the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可執行短距離存取以將關於汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊傳輸 至短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n installed in the car, the user terminal device 200 Short-distance access can be performed to transmit setting information about at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n installed in the car Devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n for short-distance access.

在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可將設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可自所接收的設定資訊提取對應於短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊,且可將控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(其為短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n),以使得裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。然而,可自接收自短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊偵測所需的一段設定資訊。在此狀況下,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可基於所偵測的設定資訊而操作,而不是在管理伺服器100的控制下操作。 In this case, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can transmit the setting information to the management server 100. Then, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n from the received setting information, and can The control signals are transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (which are short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, . ....., 300-n), so that the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can operate based on the extracted setting information. However, a piece of setting information required for detecting the pieces of information from the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n received from the short-distance access can be detected. In this case, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n can operate based on the detected setting information instead of the management server. Operate under the control of 100.

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,短距離存取的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可如圖27(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,可調整短距離存取的方向盤300-3的位置及高度。或者,可設定座椅300-2的位置、無線電300-4上的設定或導航系統300-5上的設定。 When the control signal is transmitted as described above, the short-distance access devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n may be based on the extracted as illustrated in FIG. 27(b) Set the information to operate. For example, the position and height of the steering wheel 300-3 for short-distance access can be adjusted. Alternatively, the position of the seat 300-2, the setting on the radio 300-4, or the setting on the navigation system 300-5 can be set.

請參照圖28(a),使用者可進入汽車,且可在使用者終端設備200與管理伺服器100之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可將用於基於設定資訊而操作汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的使用者ID資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 Referring to FIG. 28(a), the user can enter the car and can perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and the management server 100. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can operate the at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n installed in the car based on the setting information. The user ID information is transmitted to the management server 100.

在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊。此外,管理伺服器100可基於所提取的設定資訊而將控制訊號傳輸至至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n。 In this case, the management server 100 can extract setting information corresponding to the user ID information. Further, the management server 100 can transmit the control signal to the at least one device 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n based on the extracted setting information.

然而,在使用者終端設備200儲存關於汽車中所安裝的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊時,使用者終端設備200可執行短距離存取以將關於至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100。 However, when the user terminal device 200 stores setting information about at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n installed in the car, the user terminal device 200 Short-range access may be performed to transmit setting information about at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n to the management server 100.

在此狀況下,管理伺服器100可基於設定資訊而將用於控制裝置的控制訊號傳輸至至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)。 In this case, the management server 100 can transmit a control signal for controlling the device to at least one device based on the setting information (for example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n).

在如上所述傳輸控制訊號時,汽車中的至少一個裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n可如圖28(b)所說明基於所提取的設定資訊而操作。舉例而言,可調整方向盤300-3的高度、座椅300-2的椅背的傾斜度、座椅300-2的高度及位置。此外,在導航系統300-5的狀況下,導航系統300-5可處於「開」,具有圖形使用者介面(graphic user interface;GUI)以及對應於所提取的設定資訊的亮度的畫面可得以顯示,且音訊系統300-4可提供對應於所提取的設定資訊的音量、無線電頻道、歌曲。 When transmitting the control signal as described above, at least one of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in the car may be based on the extracted as illustrated in Figure 28(b) Set the information to operate. For example, the height of the steering wheel 300-3, the inclination of the seat back of the seat 300-2, the height and position of the seat 300-2 can be adjusted. Further, in the case of the navigation system 300-5, the navigation system 300-5 may be "on", and a screen having a graphical user interface (GUI) and brightness corresponding to the extracted setting information may be displayed. And the audio system 300-4 can provide a volume, a radio channel, and a song corresponding to the extracted setting information.

圖29為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的訂購產品的方法的圖式。請參照圖29(a),使用者可進入咖啡店,且訂購「美 式咖啡」。接著,使用者可在使用者終端設備200與安裝有短距離無線通訊讀取器以及標簽以接收訂購資訊的吧台之間執行短距離存取。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備200可如圖29(b)所說明在自身上顯示使用者訂購資訊。 29 is a diagram illustrating a method of ordering a product, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to Figure 29 (a), the user can enter the coffee shop and order "beauty Coffee." Next, the user can perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and a bar equipped with a short-range wireless communication reader and a tag to receive ordering information. In this case, the user terminal device 200 can display the user subscription information on itself as illustrated in FIG. 29(b).

此外,當在使用者終端設備200與安裝有短距離無線通訊讀取器以及標簽的吧台之間執行短距離存取時,可將使用者ID資訊自吧台傳輸至管理伺服器。管理伺服器100可根據星期幾、天氣以及最近訂購的選單而對使用者訂購資訊進行分類,且接著儲存對使用者訂購資訊進行分類的結果,以使得此結果映射至使用者ID資訊。 Further, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 200 and a bar equipped with a short-range wireless communication reader and a tag, user ID information can be transmitted from the bar to the management server. The management server 100 can classify the user subscription information according to the day of the week, the weather, and the recently ordered menu, and then store the results of classifying the user subscription information to cause the result to be mapped to the user ID information.

此後,如圖29(c)所說明,使用者可進入不同咖啡店,且可藉由在使用者終端設備200與安裝有短距離無線通訊讀取器以及標簽的吧台之間執行短距離存取而訂購產品。在此狀況下,可將使用者ID資訊自吧台傳輸至管理伺服器100。接著,管理伺服器100可基於預先設定的分類條件而提取對應於使用者ID資訊的使用者訂購資訊。 Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 29(c), the user can enter different coffee shops, and can perform short-distance access between the user terminal device 200 and a bar equipped with a short-range wireless communication reader and a tag. And order the product. In this case, user ID information can be transmitted from the bar to the management server 100. Next, the management server 100 can extract user order information corresponding to the user ID information based on the predetermined classification condition.

舉例而言,若預先設定的分類條件是星期幾,且使用者在星期一訂購咖啡,則管理伺服器100可提取使用者在星期一最常飲用的咖啡的名稱,作為對應於使用者ID資訊的使用者訂購資訊。若預先設定的分類條件是天氣,且使用者在雨天訂購咖啡,則管理伺服器100可提取使用者在雨天最常飲用的咖啡的名稱,作為對應於使用者ID資訊的使用者訂購資訊。若預先設定的分類 條件是使用者最近訂購的咖啡,則管理伺服器100可提取使用者最近訂購的咖啡的名稱,作為對應於使用者ID資訊的使用者訂購資訊。 For example, if the pre-set classification condition is the day of the week, and the user orders the coffee on Monday, the management server 100 may extract the name of the coffee most frequently consumed by the user on Monday as the information corresponding to the user ID. User subscription information. If the predetermined classification condition is weather and the user orders coffee on a rainy day, the management server 100 can extract the name of the coffee most frequently consumed by the user on a rainy day as the user order information corresponding to the user ID information. If pre-set classification The condition is that the user recently ordered the coffee, and the management server 100 can extract the name of the coffee recently ordered by the user as the user ordering information corresponding to the user ID information.

此後,如圖29(d)所說明,可在吧台上顯示所提取的使用者訂購資訊。因此,使用者可容易訂購所要選單。然而,本例示性實施例不限於此,此外,在自動系統安裝於商店中時,咖啡機可在伺服器的控制下自動沖泡及提供「美式咖啡」。 Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 29(d), the extracted user order information can be displayed on the bar. Therefore, the user can easily order the desired menu. However, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited thereto, and in addition, when the automatic system is installed in a store, the coffee machine can automatically brew and provide "American coffee" under the control of the server.

例示性實施例不限於上述實施例,且可在可訂購產品的各種場所(例如,飯店、百貨公司等)執行訂購產品的方法。此外,可安裝短距離無線通訊讀取器以及標簽的物件的類型不受此限制。 The exemplary embodiments are not limited to the above embodiments, and a method of ordering products may be performed at various places where products can be ordered (for example, restaurants, department stores, etc.). In addition, the type of object that can be installed with the short-range wireless communication reader and the label is not limited by this.

圖30為根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的使用者終端設備500的方塊圖。圖30的使用者終端設備500是圖4的使用者終端設備200的另一例示性實施例。請參照圖30,使用者終端設備500包括顯示單元510、感測器單元520、控制單元530、儲存單元540、通訊單元550、語音辨識單元560、運動辨識單元570、揚聲器580、外部輸入埠590-1至590-n以及電力供應單元595。通訊單元550、儲存單元540以及控制單元530可分別執行圖4的通訊單元210的功能、圖4的儲存單元220的功能以及圖4的控制單元230的功能。因此,此處將不會詳細描述與圖4的使用者終端設備200的結構及操作相同的圖30的使用者終端設備500的結構及操作。 FIG. 30 is a block diagram of a user terminal device 500 in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. The user terminal device 500 of FIG. 30 is another illustrative embodiment of the user terminal device 200 of FIG. Referring to FIG. 30, the user terminal device 500 includes a display unit 510, a sensor unit 520, a control unit 530, a storage unit 540, a communication unit 550, a voice recognition unit 560, a motion recognition unit 570, a speaker 580, and an external input 590. -1 to 590-n and power supply unit 595. The communication unit 550, the storage unit 540, and the control unit 530 can perform the functions of the communication unit 210 of FIG. 4, the functions of the storage unit 220 of FIG. 4, and the functions of the control unit 230 of FIG. 4, respectively. Therefore, the structure and operation of the user terminal device 500 of FIG. 30 which is the same as the configuration and operation of the user terminal device 200 of FIG. 4 will not be described in detail herein.

感測器單元520感測操作使用者終端設備500所需的各種狀態。請參照圖30,感測器單元520可包括各種感測器中的至少一些,例如,觸摸感測器521、地磁感測器522、加速度感測器523、彎曲感測器524、壓力感測器525、距離感測器526以及握持感測器527。 The sensor unit 520 senses various states required to operate the user terminal device 500. Referring to FIG. 30, the sensor unit 520 may include at least some of various sensors, for example, a touch sensor 521, a geomagnetic sensor 522, an acceleration sensor 523, a bending sensor 524, and pressure sensing. The device 525, the distance sensor 526, and the grip sensor 527.

觸摸感測器521可為靜電型或壓敏型感測器。靜電型感測器使用塗佈於顯示單元510的表面上的介電物質,且在顯示單元510的表面由使用者的身體的部分觸摸時,感測對應於使用者的身體的微電流,且接著計算觸摸坐標。壓敏型感測器包括上下兩個電極板,且在使用者觸摸畫面時,感測在對應於畫面上的觸摸位置的上電極板與下電極板的部分彼此接觸時流動的電流,且接著計算觸摸坐標。如上所述,觸摸感測器521可實現為各種類型的感測器中的任一者。 The touch sensor 521 can be an electrostatic or pressure sensitive sensor. The electrostatic type sensor uses a dielectric substance coated on the surface of the display unit 510, and when the surface of the display unit 510 is touched by a part of the user's body, senses a micro current corresponding to the body of the user, and The touch coordinates are then calculated. The pressure-sensitive type sensor includes two upper and lower electrode plates, and senses a current flowing when a portion of the upper electrode plate and the lower electrode plate corresponding to the touch position on the screen contact each other when the user touches the screen, and then Calculate the touch coordinates. As described above, the touch sensor 521 can be implemented as any of various types of sensors.

地磁(terrestrial magnetic)感測器522感測使用者終端設備500的旋轉狀態以及使用者終端設備500移動的方向。加速度感測器523感測使用者終端設備500傾斜的程度。地磁感測器522及加速度感測器523可用於感測使用者終端設備500彎曲的方向或使用者終端設備500的彎曲部分。此外,地磁感測器522及加速度感測器523可用於感測使用者終端設備500的旋轉狀態或傾斜狀態。 A terrestrial magnetic sensor 522 senses the rotational state of the user terminal device 500 and the direction in which the user terminal device 500 moves. The acceleration sensor 523 senses the degree to which the user terminal device 500 is tilted. The geomagnetic sensor 522 and the acceleration sensor 523 can be used to sense the direction in which the user terminal device 500 is bent or the curved portion of the user terminal device 500. Further, the geomagnetic sensor 522 and the acceleration sensor 523 can be used to sense the rotational state or the tilt state of the user terminal device 500.

在使用者終端設備500實現為可撓性顯示設備時,彎曲感測器524可感測使用者終端設備500的彎曲狀態。 When the user terminal device 500 is implemented as a flexible display device, the bending sensor 524 can sense the bending state of the user terminal device 500.

在使用者觸摸或彎曲使用者終端設備500時,壓力感測器525感測施加至使用者終端設備500上的壓力,且將感測壓力的結果提供至控制單元530。壓力感測器525可包括壓電薄膜,所述壓電薄膜包括於顯示單元510中,且輸出對應於施加至使用者終端設備500上的壓力的電訊號。雖然圖30將壓力感測器525及觸摸感測器521說明為不同感測器,但在觸摸感測器521為壓敏觸摸感測器時,壓敏觸摸感測器亦可起壓力感測器525的作用。 When the user touches or bends the user terminal device 500, the pressure sensor 525 senses the pressure applied to the user terminal device 500 and provides the result of the sensed pressure to the control unit 530. The pressure sensor 525 may include a piezoelectric film included in the display unit 510 and outputting an electrical signal corresponding to a pressure applied to the user terminal device 500. Although FIG. 30 illustrates the pressure sensor 525 and the touch sensor 521 as different sensors, the pressure sensitive touch sensor can also be used for pressure sensing when the touch sensor 521 is a pressure sensitive touch sensor. The role of the device 525.

距離(proximity)感測器526感測在物件不直接接觸顯示單元510的表面時物件接近顯示單元510的運動。距離感測器526可實現為各種感測器中的任一者,例如:高頻振盪型感測器,其形成高頻磁場,且感測由於在物件接近顯示單元510時改變的磁場特性而誘發的電流;磁性感測器,其使用磁體;以及靜電型感測器,其感測在物件接近顯示單元510時改變的靜電電容。 The proximity sensor 526 senses the movement of the object near the display unit 510 when the object does not directly contact the surface of the display unit 510. The distance sensor 526 can be implemented as any of various sensors, such as a high frequency oscillating type sensor that forms a high frequency magnetic field and senses a magnetic field characteristic that changes due to an object approaching the display unit 510. An induced current; a magnetic sensor that uses a magnet; and an electrostatic type sensor that senses an electrostatic capacitance that changes when the object approaches the display unit 510.

握持感測器527獨立於壓力感測器525而置放於使用者終端設備500的邊緣或手柄處,且感測使用者的握持。握持感測器527可實現為壓力感測器或觸摸感測器。 The grip sensor 527 is placed at the edge or handle of the user terminal device 500 independently of the pressure sensor 525 and senses the grip of the user. The grip sensor 527 can be implemented as a pressure sensor or a touch sensor.

控制單元530藉由分析由感測單元520感測的各種感測訊號中而解譯使用者輸入,並執行對應於使用者輸入的操作。 The control unit 530 interprets the user input by analyzing various sensing signals sensed by the sensing unit 520, and performs an operation corresponding to the user input.

舉例而言,控制單元530可處理經由與外部裝置通訊而獲得的資料或儲存單元540中所儲存的資料,且經由顯示單元510、揚聲器580或其類似者而輸出處理資料的結果。在此狀況下,控制單元530可經由通訊單元550而與外部裝置通訊。 For example, the control unit 530 can process the material obtained through communication with the external device or the material stored in the storage unit 540, and output the result of processing the data via the display unit 510, the speaker 580, or the like. In this case, the control unit 530 can communicate with an external device via the communication unit 550.

通訊單元550經組態以根據各種通訊方法中的任一者而與各種類型的外部裝置建立通訊。通訊單元550可包括各種通訊模組中的至少一些,諸如,廣播接收模組551、短距離無線通訊模組552、全球定位系統(global positioning system;GPS)模組553以及無線通訊模組554。廣播接收模組551可包括:地面廣播接收模組(未圖示),包括用於接收地面廣播訊號的天線、解調變器以及等化器;數位多媒體廣播(digital multimedia broadcasting;DMB)廣播,其接收且處理DMB廣播訊號;及其類似者。短距離無線通訊模組552為根據短距離無線通訊方法(諸如,NFC、藍芽以及ZigBee)而與位於短距離內的外部裝置建立通訊的模組。GPS模組553為藉由自GPS衛星接收GPS訊號而偵測使用者終端設備500的當前位置的感測器。無線通訊模組554為根據無線通訊協定(諸如,WiFi及IEEE)而連接至外部網路以建立通訊的模組。此外,通訊模組552可包括行動通訊模組,所述行動通訊模組藉由根據各種行動電信標準中的任一者(例如,3G行動電信網路、第3代合作夥伴計劃(3-generation partnership project;3GPP)或長期演進(long term evolution;LTE))存取行動電信網路而建立通訊。 Communication unit 550 is configured to establish communication with various types of external devices in accordance with any of a variety of communication methods. The communication unit 550 can include at least some of various communication modules, such as a broadcast receiving module 551, a short-range wireless communication module 552, a global positioning system (GPS) module 553, and a wireless communication module 554. The broadcast receiving module 551 may include: a terrestrial broadcast receiving module (not shown), including an antenna for receiving terrestrial broadcast signals, a demodulation transformer and an equalizer, and a digital multimedia broadcasting (DMB) broadcast. It receives and processes DMB broadcast signals; and the like. The short-range wireless communication module 552 is a module that establishes communication with external devices located within a short distance according to short-range wireless communication methods such as NFC, Bluetooth, and ZigBee. The GPS module 553 is a sensor that detects the current position of the user terminal device 500 by receiving a GPS signal from a GPS satellite. The wireless communication module 554 is a module that is connected to an external network to establish communication according to a wireless communication protocol such as WiFi and IEEE. In addition, the communication module 552 can include a mobile communication module by any one of various mobile telecommunication standards (eg, 3G mobile telecommunications network, 3rd generation partner program (3-generation) Partnership project; 3GPP) or long term evolution (LTE) access to the mobile telecommunications network to establish communications.

控制單元530可啟動通訊單元550的元件中執行使用者希望執行的操作所需的一些元件,且執行所要操作。 The control unit 530 can activate some of the components of the elements of the communication unit 550 that are required to perform the operations that the user desires to perform, and perform the desired operations.

除彎曲操作或觸摸操作之外,控制單元530可辨識語音輸入或運動輸入,且執行對應於此輸入的操作。在此狀況下,可 啟動語音辨識單元560或運動辨識單元570。 In addition to the bending operation or the touch operation, the control unit 530 can recognize the voice input or the motion input and perform an operation corresponding to the input. In this situation, The speech recognition unit 560 or the motion recognition unit 570 is activated.

語音辨識單元560可藉由使用語音獲取單元(例如,麥克風(未圖示))而收集使用者的語音或外部聲音,且將使用者的語音或外部聲音傳遞至控制單元530。在控制單元530在語音控制模式中操作且使用者的語音匹配預先設定的語音命令時,控制單元530可執行對應於使用者的語音的任務。可使用語音來控制的任務的實例可包括:音量控制、頻道選擇、頻道切換、顯示屬性控制、重播、暫時暫停、倒轉、快進、執行應用程式、選單選擇、開啟設備、關斷設備等。 The voice recognition unit 560 can collect the user's voice or external sound by using a voice acquisition unit (for example, a microphone (not shown)), and transmit the user's voice or external voice to the control unit 530. When the control unit 530 operates in the voice control mode and the voice of the user matches a predetermined voice command, the control unit 530 may perform a task corresponding to the voice of the user. Examples of tasks that may be controlled using voice may include: volume control, channel selection, channel switching, display attribute control, replay, temporary pause, reverse, fast forward, execute application, menu selection, turn on device, turn off device, and the like.

運動辨識單元570藉由使用成像單元(未圖示;例如,相機)來攝取使用者的影像,且將使用者的影像提供至控制單元530。在控制單元530在運動控制模式中操作時,控制單元530分析使用者的影像。在判定使用者作出對應於預先設定的運動命令的運動示意動作時,控制單元530執行對應於運動示意動作的操作。舉例而言,可藉由使用者的運動來控制各種任務,例如,頻道切換、開啟設備、關斷設備、暫時暫停、再生、重播、暫停、倒轉、快進以及靜音。可藉由語音來控制的任務以及可藉由運動來控制的任務僅為實例,且因此,本發明不限於此。 The motion recognition unit 570 captures an image of the user by using an imaging unit (not shown; for example, a camera), and supplies the image of the user to the control unit 530. When the control unit 530 operates in the motion control mode, the control unit 530 analyzes the image of the user. When it is determined that the user makes a motion gesture corresponding to the preset motion command, the control unit 530 performs an operation corresponding to the motion gesture. For example, various tasks can be controlled by the user's motion, such as channel switching, turning on the device, turning off the device, temporarily pausing, replaying, replaying, pausing, reversing, fast forwarding, and muting. The tasks that can be controlled by voice and the tasks that can be controlled by motion are merely examples, and thus, the present invention is not limited thereto.

此外,外部輸入埠590-1至590-n中可連接至各種外部裝置中的任一者,以接收各種資料、程式以及控制命令。具體而言,外部輸入埠590-1至590-n可包括USB埠、耳機埠、滑鼠埠、LAN埠等。 Further, the external inputs 埠590-1 to 590-n can be connected to any of various external devices to receive various materials, programs, and control commands. Specifically, the external inputs 埠590-1 to 590-n may include a USB port, a headphone port, a mouse pad, a LAN port, and the like.

電力供應單元595將電力供應至使用者終端設備500的元件。 The power supply unit 595 supplies power to elements of the user terminal device 500.

控制單元530可控制顯示單元510以提供:顯示關於網域中的裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的當前設定資訊的UI畫面;在經由短距離存取而改變關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的當前設定資訊時顯示所改變的設定資訊的UI畫面;以及手動改變關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊的UI畫面。 The control unit 530 can control the display unit 510 to provide: display a UI screen regarding current setting information of the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n in the network domain; a UI screen displaying the changed setting information when the current setting information about the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n is changed by short-distance access; and manually changing the related device UI screen for setting information of 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n.

此處,可提供UI畫面,以使得經由通訊單元550自管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400接收的關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊反映於使用者終端設備500的儲存單元540中所儲存的UI中。 Here, a UI screen may be provided to enable the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n received from the management server 100 or the cloud server 400 via the communication unit 550. The setting information is reflected in the UI stored in the storage unit 540 of the user terminal device 500.

另外,可藉由接收反映經由通訊單元550自管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400接收的關於裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n的設定資訊的UI而提供UI畫面。在此狀況下,通訊單元550亦可自管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400接收控制命令,所述控制命令是自使用者終端設備500接收且對應於UI規格(GUI)以及UI。此外,可接收用於與管理伺服器100以及雲端伺服器400通訊的通訊連接資訊。在此狀況下,通訊連接可包括密碼以及用於經由具體通訊方式(例如,WiFi)存取管理伺服器100或雲端伺服器400的通訊協定資訊。下文將參照圖31至圖47來詳細描述此UI畫面。 In addition, setting information about the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n received from the management server 100 or the cloud server 400 via the communication unit 550 can be received. The UI provides the UI screen. In this case, the communication unit 550 can also receive a control command from the management server 100 or the cloud server 400, which is received from the user terminal device 500 and corresponds to a UI specification (GUI) and a UI. In addition, communication connection information for communicating with the management server 100 and the cloud server 400 can be received. In this case, the communication connection may include a password and communication protocol information for accessing the management server 100 or the cloud server 400 via a specific communication method (eg, WiFi). This UI screen will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 47.

控制單元530可改變使用者終端設備500的通訊方式。舉例而言,在使用WiFi通訊的使用者終端設備500存取網域時,使用者終端設備500的通訊方式可自WiFi通訊改變至3G通訊方式。 The control unit 530 can change the communication mode of the user terminal device 500. For example, when the user terminal device 500 using the WiFi communication accesses the domain, the communication mode of the user terminal device 500 can be changed from the WiFi communication to the 3G communication mode.

圖31至圖47說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的用於控制使用者終端設備的UI畫面。在圖31至圖47中,實線箭頭各自表示由使用者輸入引起的畫面的改變,且虛線箭頭各自表示畫面的自動改變。 31 to 47 illustrate a UI screen for controlling a user terminal device, according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. In FIGS. 31 to 47, solid arrows respectively indicate changes in the screen caused by user input, and dashed arrows each indicate an automatic change of the screen.

圖31至圖38說明可在家庭網域或旅館網域中顯示於使用者終端設備上的UI畫面。 31 to 38 illustrate UI screens that can be displayed on a user terminal device in a home domain or a hotel domain.

在使用者基於用於存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊而存取所述網域時,可如圖31(a)所說明而顯示含有關於所述網域中的至少一個裝置的當前設定資訊的UI畫面。 When the user accesses the domain based on the authorization information for accessing the domain managed by the management server 100, it may be displayed as described in FIG. 31(a) with respect to at least one of the domains. The UI screen of the current setting information of the device.

此外,在基於對應於所傳輸的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊而控制網域中的至少一個裝置時,可如圖31(b)所說明而顯示表示至少一個裝置的受控制狀態的UI畫面。在此畫面中,可基於對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊而自動改變「TV音量」及「音訊」。 Further, when at least one device in the network domain is controlled based on the setting information corresponding to the transmitted user ID information, a UI screen indicating the controlled state of at least one device may be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 31(b). In this screen, "TV volume" and "audio" can be automatically changed based on the setting information corresponding to the user ID information.

在使用者選擇「情境3101」以自動設定關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊時,可如圖31(c)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面。若在手動設定畫面中,使用者改變關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊,則可將所改變的設定資訊應用於至少一個裝置。在此狀況下,可在UI畫面中顯示所改變的設定資訊。此處,考慮到使用者的喜好, 可按照各種方式中的任一者來顯示手動設定畫面。當在圖31(c)的UI畫面中選擇「返回3102」時,可顯示圖31(b)的UI畫面(其為先前畫面)。 When the user selects "Scenario 3101" to automatically set the setting information about at least one device, the manual setting screen can be displayed as explained in FIG. 31(c). If the user changes the setting information about the at least one device in the manual setting screen, the changed setting information can be applied to at least one device. In this case, the changed setting information can be displayed in the UI screen. Here, taking into account the user's preferences, The manual setting screen can be displayed in any of various ways. When "Return 3102" is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 31(c), the UI screen of FIG. 31(b) (which is the previous screen) can be displayed.

雖然在圖31中,根據「音訊及視訊」、「燈光」、「裝置控制」來對UI畫面分類,且接著按照類別清單的形式來顯示UI畫面,但UI畫面不限於此。 In FIG. 31, the UI screen is classified according to "audio and video", "light", and "device control", and then the UI screen is displayed in the form of a category list, but the UI screen is not limited to this.

舉例而言,如圖32所說明,可並未對UI畫面分類,且可僅按照清單的形式顯示UI畫面。若如圖32所說明而顯示UI畫面且選擇「情境3201」以及「返回3102」,則可執行上文參照圖31所述的操作。 For example, as illustrated in FIG. 32, the UI screen may not be classified, and the UI screen may be displayed only in the form of a list. If the UI screen is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 32 and "Scenario 3201" and "Return 3102" are selected, the operations described above with reference to FIG. 31 can be performed.

此外,可如圖33或圖34所說明按照影像的形式來顯示UI畫面。 Further, the UI screen may be displayed in the form of an image as illustrated in FIG. 33 or FIG.

換句話說,如圖33或圖34所說明,可根據使用者的家庭中房間來顯示使用者的家庭的影像。在此狀況下,如圖33(c)所說明,UI畫面可顯示「房間燈光」,「房間燈光」為用於對整個家庭照明的當前設定資訊。此外,如圖33(d)所說明,UI畫面可顯示基於對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊來自動改變「房間燈光」的結果。若在圖33(d)的UI畫面中選擇「情境3301」,則可如圖33(e)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面。 In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 33 or FIG. 34, an image of the user's home can be displayed according to the room in the user's home. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 33(c), the UI screen can display "room lighting", which is the current setting information for lighting the entire home. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 33(d), the UI screen can display a result of automatically changing the "room light" based on the setting information corresponding to the user ID information. When "Scenario 3301" is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 33(d), the manual setting screen can be displayed as explained in FIG. 33(e).

若在圖34(b)的UI畫面中選擇區域3401,則可如圖34(c)所說明而顯示用於關於包括至少一個房間的家庭的設定資訊的UI畫面。若在圖34(c)的UI畫面中選擇每一房間3402,則可如圖34(d) 所說明而顯示用於改變關於所選擇的房間的設定資訊的UI畫面。 If the area 3401 is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 34(b), a UI screen for setting information about the home including at least one room can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 34(c). If each room 3402 is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 34(c), it can be as shown in FIG. 34(d). A UI screen for changing setting information about the selected room is displayed as illustrated.

圖35說明用於關於至少一個裝置的手動設定資訊的UI畫面。當在顯示當前設定資訊(例如,「TV音量」及「音訊」)時使用者如圖35(b)所說明而選擇「情境3501」時,可如圖35(a)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面。在此狀況下,在使用者選擇「清新3502」時,可如圖35(c)所說明而顯示用於手動改變關於「清新」模式的設定資訊的UI畫面。若使用者在圖35(c)的UI畫面中選擇「確認」3505,則基於對應於「清新」模式的設定資訊,圖35(b)的UI畫面可改變為顯示關於(例如)「TV音量」及「音訊」的所改變的設定資訊的圖35(d)的UI畫面。 Figure 35 illustrates a UI screen for manual setting information regarding at least one device. When the user selects "Scenario 3501" as described in FIG. 35(b) when the current setting information (for example, "TV volume" and "audio") is displayed, the manual setting can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 35(a). Picture. In this case, when the user selects "fresh 3502", a UI screen for manually changing the setting information regarding the "fresh" mode can be displayed as explained in FIG. 35(c). If the user selects "confirm" 3505 in the UI screen of FIG. 35(c), the UI screen of FIG. 35(b) can be changed to display about (for example, "TV volume" based on the setting information corresponding to the "fresh" mode. And the UI screen of Fig. 35(d) of the changed setting information of "information".

若使用者在圖35(c)的UI畫面中選擇「情境」3503,則可顯示圖35(a)的UI畫面。在此狀況下,在使用者在圖35(a)的UI畫面中選擇「確認」3504時,基於對應於「清新」模式的設定資訊,圖35(b)的UI畫面可改變為顯示關於(例如)「TV音量」及「音訊」的所改變的設定資訊的圖35(d)的UI畫面。 When the user selects "context" 3503 in the UI screen of FIG. 35(c), the UI screen of FIG. 35(a) can be displayed. In this case, when the user selects "confirm" 3504 in the UI screen of FIG. 35(a), the UI screen of FIG. 35(b) can be changed to display related (based on the setting information corresponding to the "fresh" mode. For example, the UI screen of Fig. 35(d) of the changed setting information of "TV volume" and "audio".

此外,可顯示將向使用者推薦的設定資訊。舉例而言,如圖35(b)所說明,可顯示對使用者推薦以將當前設定資訊改變為關於住在OOO旅館的「金先生」的設定資訊的設定資訊(「名人設定」)或可向使用者推薦家庭設定資訊(「家庭設定」)。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備500可經由社交網路服務(social networking service;SNS)而將推薦設定資訊傳輸至另一使用者終端設備。 In addition, setting information that will be recommended to the user can be displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 35(b), a setting recommended for the user to change the current setting information to the setting information about "Mr. King" living in the OOO hotel ("Celebrity Setting") may be displayed or may be displayed. Recommend family setting information ("Family Settings") to the user. In this case, the user terminal device 500 can transmit the recommended setting information to another user terminal device via a social networking service (SNS).

雖然圖35說明按照類別清單的形式而顯示UI畫面,但 UI畫面不限於此。 Although FIG. 35 illustrates that the UI screen is displayed in the form of a category list, The UI screen is not limited to this.

舉例而言,如圖36所說明,可僅按照清單的形式顯示UI畫面。在此狀況下,在選擇圖36所說明的3601、3602、3603、3604及3605時,可執行上文參照圖35所述的操作。 For example, as illustrated in FIG. 36, the UI screen can be displayed only in the form of a list. In this case, when the 3601, 3602, 3603, 3604, and 3605 illustrated in FIG. 36 are selected, the operations described above with reference to FIG. 35 can be performed.

另外,可如圖37或圖38所說明按照影像的形式來顯示UI畫面。在此狀況下,當在如圖37(a)及圖37(b)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面時選擇對應於「工作」模式的「確認」3701時,基於對應於「工作」模式的設定資訊,顯示當前設定資訊的圖37(c)的UI畫面可改變為顯示關於(例如)「燈光」及「裝置控制」的所改變的設定資訊的圖37(d)的UI畫面。 In addition, the UI screen can be displayed in the form of an image as illustrated in FIG. 37 or FIG. In this case, when the "confirmation" 3701 corresponding to the "work" mode is selected when the manual setting screen is displayed as illustrated in FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b), the setting corresponding to the "work" mode is selected. The UI screen of FIG. 37(c) displaying the current setting information can be changed to display the UI screen of FIG. 37(d) regarding the changed setting information of, for example, "light" and "device control".

此外,當在如圖38(a)及圖38(b)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面時選擇對應於「工作」模式的「確認」3801時,關於所有房間的當前設定資訊可改變為對應於「工作」模式的設定資訊,藉此顯示圖38(c)的UI畫面,在圖38(c)的UI畫面中,顯示了關於(例如)「燈光」及「裝置控制」的所改變的設定資訊。當在圖38(c)的UI畫面中選擇具體房間3802時,可將關於所選擇的房間的設定資訊改變為對應於「工作」模式的設定資訊,藉此顯示圖38(d)的UI畫面,在圖38(d)的UI畫面中,顯示了關於(例如)「燈光」及「裝置控制」的所改變的設定資訊。 Further, when the "confirmation" 3801 corresponding to the "work" mode is selected when the manual setting screen is displayed as illustrated in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), the current setting information about all the rooms can be changed to correspond to The setting information of the "work" mode is used to display the UI screen of FIG. 38(c), and the changed settings of, for example, "light" and "device control" are displayed on the UI screen of FIG. 38(c). News. When the specific room 3802 is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 38(c), the setting information about the selected room can be changed to the setting information corresponding to the "work" mode, thereby displaying the UI screen of FIG. 38(d). In the UI screen of FIG. 38(d), the changed setting information about, for example, "light" and "device control" is displayed.

圖39至圖46說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的可在汽車網域中顯示於使用者終端設備上的UI畫面。 39 to 46 illustrate UI screens that may be displayed on a user terminal device in a car network domain, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention.

在使用者基於用於存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的 授權資訊而存取所述網域時,可如圖39(a)所說明而顯示含有關於汽車網域中的至少一個裝置的當前設定資訊的UI畫面。 At the user's basis for accessing the domain managed by the management server 100 When the domain is accessed by authorizing information, a UI screen containing current setting information about at least one device in the car domain can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 39(a).

在基於對應於所傳輸的使用者ID資訊的設定資訊而控制汽車網域中的至少一個裝置時,可如圖39(b)所說明而顯示指示至少一個裝置的受控制狀態的UI畫面。亦即,可顯示UI畫面,在所述UI畫面中,「TV音量」、「低音揚聲器」以及「門控燈」基於對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊而自動改變。 When at least one device in the car network domain is controlled based on the setting information corresponding to the transmitted user ID information, a UI screen indicating the controlled state of at least one device may be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 39(b). That is, the UI screen can be displayed, in which the "TV volume", "woofer", and "gated light" are automatically changed based on the setting information corresponding to the user ID information.

在使用者選擇「情境3901」以自動設定關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊時,可如圖39(c)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面。若在手動設定畫面中,使用者改變關於至少一個裝置的設定資訊,則可將所述設定資訊應用於至少一個裝置。在此狀況下,UI畫面可顯示所改變的設定資訊。此處,考慮到使用者的喜好,可按照各種方式中的任一者來顯示手動設定畫面。當在圖39(c)的UI畫面中選擇「返回3902」時,可顯示圖39(b)的UI畫面(其為先前畫面)。 When the user selects "Scenario 3901" to automatically set the setting information about at least one device, the manual setting screen can be displayed as explained in FIG. 39(c). If the user changes the setting information about the at least one device in the manual setting screen, the setting information can be applied to at least one device. In this case, the UI screen can display the changed setting information. Here, the manual setting screen can be displayed in any of various ways in consideration of the user's preference. When "return 3902" is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 39(c), the UI screen of FIG. 39(b) (which is the previous screen) can be displayed.

雖然圖39說明根據「音訊及視訊」、「燈光」、「溫度」及其類似者來對UI畫面分類,且接著按照類別清單的形式來顯示UI畫面,但本例示性實施例不限於此。舉例而言,如圖40所說明,可並未對UI畫面分類,且可僅按照清單的形式顯示UI畫面。若如圖40所說明而顯示UI畫面且選擇「情境4001」以及「返回4002」,則可執行上文參照圖39所述的操作。 Although FIG. 39 illustrates that the UI screen is classified according to "audio and video", "light", "temperature", and the like, and then the UI screen is displayed in the form of a category list, the present exemplary embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 40, the UI screen may not be classified, and the UI screen may be displayed only in the form of a list. If the UI screen is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 40 and "Scenario 4001" and "Return 4002" are selected, the operations described above with reference to FIG. 39 can be performed.

另外,可如圖41或圖42所說明按照影像的形式來顯示 UI畫面。 In addition, it can be displayed in the form of an image as illustrated in FIG. 41 or FIG. 42. UI screen.

換句話說,如圖41或圖42所說明,可根據汽車的座椅佈置來顯示汽車的影像。在此狀況下,如圖41(c)所說明,可顯示對「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」進行顯示的UI畫面,「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」為整個汽車的當前設定資訊。此外,如圖41(d)所說明,可顯示對基於對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊來自動改變「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」的結果進行顯示的UI畫面。此外,當在圖41(d)的UI畫面中選擇「情境4101」時,可顯示如圖41(e)所說明的手動設定畫面。 In other words, as illustrated in FIG. 41 or FIG. 42, the image of the car can be displayed according to the seat arrangement of the car. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 41(c), a UI screen for displaying "TV volume" and "woofer" can be displayed, and "TV volume" and "woofer" are current setting information of the entire car. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 41(d), a UI screen for automatically changing the results of the "TV volume" and the "woofer" based on the setting information corresponding to the user ID information can be displayed. Further, when "Scenario 4101" is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 41(d), the manual setting screen as explained in FIG. 41(e) can be displayed.

圖42(b)的UI畫面可用於關於汽車網域中的所有裝置的設定資訊。此外,在圖42(c)的UI畫面中選擇座椅中(4201)時,可如圖42(d)所說明而顯示用於改變關於所選擇的座椅的設定資訊的UI畫面。 The UI screen of Fig. 42(b) can be used for setting information about all devices in the car domain. Further, when the seat (4201) is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 42(c), a UI screen for changing setting information regarding the selected seat can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 42(d).

圖43說明用於關於至少一個裝置的手動設定資訊的UI畫面。當如圖43(b)所說明在顯示當前設定資訊(例如,「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」)時使用者選擇「情境4301」時,可如圖43(a)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面。此處,在使用者選擇「清新4302」時,可如圖43(c)所說明而顯示用於手動改變關於「清新」模式的設定資訊的UI畫面。若使用者在圖43(c)的UI畫面中選擇「確認」4305,則基於對應於「清新」模式的設定資訊,圖43(b)的UI畫面可改變為顯示關於「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」的所改變的設定資訊的圖43(d)的UI畫面。 Figure 43 illustrates a UI screen for manual setting information regarding at least one device. When the user selects "Scenario 4301" when the current setting information (for example, "TV volume" and "woofer") is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 43(b), the manual setting can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 43(a). Picture. Here, when the user selects "fresh 4302", a UI screen for manually changing setting information regarding the "fresh" mode can be displayed as explained in FIG. 43(c). If the user selects "confirm" 4305 in the UI screen of FIG. 43(c), the UI screen of FIG. 43(b) can be changed to display "TV volume" and "based on the setting information corresponding to the "fresh" mode. The UI screen of Fig. 43 (d) of the changed setting information of the woofer.

在使用者在圖43(c)的UI畫面中選擇「情境4303」時,可顯示圖43(a)的UI畫面。在此狀況下,在使用者在圖43(a)的UI畫面中選擇「確認」4304時,基於對應於「清新」模式的設定資訊,圖43(b)的UI畫面改變為顯示關於(例如)「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」的所改變的設定資訊的圖43(d)的UI畫面。 When the user selects "Scenario 4303" in the UI screen of FIG. 43(c), the UI screen of FIG. 43(a) can be displayed. In this case, when the user selects "confirm" 4304 in the UI screen of FIG. 43(a), the UI screen of FIG. 43(b) is changed to display related based on the setting information corresponding to the "fresh" mode (for example). The UI screen of Fig. 43 (d) of the changed setting information of "TV volume" and "woofer".

雖然圖43說明按照類別清單的形式而顯示UI畫面,但UI畫面不限於此。 Although FIG. 43 illustrates that the UI screen is displayed in the form of a category list, the UI screen is not limited thereto.

舉例而言,如圖44所說明,可僅按照清單的形式顯示UI畫面。在此狀況下,可選擇圖44所說明的按鈕4401、4402、4403、4404或4405時,且可執行上文參照圖43所述的操作。 For example, as illustrated in FIG. 44, the UI screen can be displayed only in the form of a list. In this case, the buttons 4401, 4402, 4403, 4404, or 4405 illustrated in FIG. 44 may be selected, and the operations described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be performed.

此外,可如圖45或圖46所說明而顯示UI畫面。 Further, the UI screen can be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 45 or FIG.

在此狀況下,當在如圖45(a)及圖45(b)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面時選擇對應於「娛樂」模式的「確認」4501時,基於對應於「娛樂」模式的設定資訊,顯示當前設定資訊的手動設定畫面可改變為顯示關於(例如)如圖45(c)所說明的「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」的所改變的設定資訊的圖45(d)的UI畫面。 In this case, when the "confirmation" 4501 corresponding to the "entertainment" mode is selected when the manual setting screen is displayed as illustrated in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), the setting corresponding to the "entertainment" mode is selected. Information, the manual setting screen displaying the current setting information can be changed to display the UI of FIG. 45(d) regarding, for example, the changed setting information of "TV volume" and "woofer" as illustrated in FIG. 45(c). Picture.

此外,當在如圖46(a)及圖46(b)所說明而顯示手動設定畫面時選擇對應於「工作」模式的「確認」4601時,關於汽車的內部的當前設定資訊改變為對應於「工作」模式的設定資訊,藉此顯示圖46(c)的UI畫面,在圖46(c)的UI畫面中,展示了關於(例如)「TV音量」及「低音揚聲器」的所改變的設定資訊。當在圖46(c)的UI畫面中選擇座椅4602時,可將關於所選擇的座椅 4602的設定資訊改變為對應於「工作」模式的設定資訊,藉此顯示對關於(例如)「後座椅溫度」及其類似者的所改變的設定資訊進行顯示的圖46(d)的UI畫面。 Further, when the "confirmation" 4601 corresponding to the "work" mode is selected when the manual setting screen is displayed as illustrated in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), the current setting information about the interior of the car is changed to correspond to The setting information of the "work" mode is used to display the UI screen of FIG. 46(c), and in the UI screen of FIG. 46(c), the changes of, for example, "TV volume" and "woofer" are displayed. Set the information. When the seat 4602 is selected in the UI screen of FIG. 46(c), the selected seat can be selected. The setting information of 4602 is changed to the setting information corresponding to the "working" mode, thereby displaying the UI of FIG. 46(d) for displaying the changed setting information about, for example, "rear seat temperature" and the like. Picture.

圖47說明根據本發明的另一例示性實施例的基於至少一個裝置的類型的設定資訊的UI畫面。請參照圖47(a),UI畫面可包括關於「音訊及視訊」的設定資訊、關於「燈光」的設定資訊以及關於「裝置控制」的設定資訊(關於待控制的裝置的設定資訊)。在此狀況下,使用者可允許藉由選擇「燈光4701」來如圖47(b)所說明而顯示關於「燈光」的設定資訊的細節,且可允許藉由選擇「裝置控制4702」來如圖47(c)所說明而顯示關於「裝置控制」的設定資訊的細節。 FIG. 47 illustrates a UI screen based on setting information of a type of at least one device, according to another exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 47( a ), the UI screen may include setting information about “intelligence and video”, setting information about “lighting”, and setting information about “device control” (setting information about the device to be controlled). In this case, the user can allow details of the setting information about "light" to be displayed as illustrated in FIG. 47(b) by selecting "light 4701", and can be allowed to be selected by selecting "device control 4702". The details of the setting information regarding "device control" are shown in Fig. 47 (c).

圖48為說明根據本發明的一例示性實施例的遊戲環境設定系統3000的圖式。請參照圖48,遊戲環境設定系統3000包括第一遊戲控制台600-1、第二遊戲控制台600-2以及使用者終端設備700。 FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game environment setting system 3000 in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 48, the game environment setting system 3000 includes a first game console 600-1, a second game console 600-2, and a user terminal device 700.

第一遊戲控制台600-1、第二遊戲控制台600-2以及使用者終端設備700可各自包括用於在執行短距離存取時建立短距離無線通訊的短距離無線通訊模組。此處,可基於NFC來執行短距離存取。 The first game console 600-1, the second game console 600-2, and the user terminal device 700 can each include a short-range wireless communication module for establishing short-range wireless communication when performing short-range access. Here, short-distance access can be performed based on NFC.

下文中,為便於解釋,將第一遊戲控制台600-1以及第二遊戲控制台600-2分別稱為傳輸側遊戲控制台以及接收側遊戲控制台。 Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the first game console 600-1 and the second game console 600-2 are referred to as a transmission side game console and a reception side game console, respectively.

當在第一遊戲控制台600-1與使用者終端設備700之間執行短距離存取時,第一遊戲控制台600-1可將自身的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至使用者終端設備700。 When performing short-distance access between the first game console 600-1 and the user terminal device 700, the first game console 600-1 may transmit its own ID information and game environment information to the user terminal device 700. .

在使用者終端設備700自第一遊戲控制台600-1接收關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊時,使用者終端設備700可儲存所接收的遊戲環境資訊,使其映射至第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊。 When the user terminal device 700 receives the ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game environment information from the first game console 600-1, the user terminal device 700 can store the received game environment information so that the user terminal device 700 can The ID information mapped to the first game console 600-1.

當在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取時,使用者終端設備700可將其中所儲存的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2可自接收自使用者終端設備700的ID資訊偵測匹配與第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊匹配的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊。 When short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the user terminal device 700 can transmit the ID information stored therein and the game environment information to the second game console 600. -2. In this case, the second game console 600-2 may detect game environment information matching the ID information matching the ID information of the second game console 600-2 from the ID information received from the user terminal device 700.

此外,當在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取時,使用者終端設備700可自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備700可自其中所儲存的遊戲環境資訊偵測對應於關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊,且將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。 Further, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the user terminal device 700 can receive the second game console 600 from the second game console 600-2. -2 ID information. In this case, the user terminal device 700 can detect the game environment information corresponding to the ID information about the second game console 600-2 from the game environment information stored therein, and transmit the detected game environment information. To the second game console 600-2.

第二遊戲控制台600-2可基於由使用者終端設備700偵測且自使用者終端設備700接收的遊戲環境資訊或自第二遊戲控制台600-2偵測的遊戲環境資訊而設定自身的遊戲環境資訊。 The second game console 600-2 can set its own based on the game environment information detected by the user terminal device 700 and received from the user terminal device 700 or the game environment information detected from the second game console 600-2. Game environment information.

此處,ID資訊意謂識別各種遊戲控制台中的任一者(例如,第一遊戲控制台600-1或第二遊戲控制台600-2)或第一遊戲控制台600-1或第二遊戲控制台600-2中玩的遊戲的資訊。詳細而言,識別各種遊戲控制台中的任一者(例如,第一遊戲控制台600-1或第二遊戲控制台600-2)的資訊可包括遊戲控制台類型資訊(例如,識別遊戲控制台的製造商或遊戲控制台類型的資訊)以及遊戲控制台序列號資訊。此外,識別各種遊戲控制台中的任一者(例如,第一遊戲控制台600-1或第二遊戲控制台600-2)中玩的遊戲的資訊可包括遊戲類型資訊(例如,識別遊戲名稱的資訊)。 Here, the ID information means identifying any of various game consoles (for example, the first game console 600-1 or the second game console 600-2) or the first game console 600-1 or the second game. Information about the game played in console 600-2. In detail, the information identifying any of the various game consoles (eg, the first game console 600-1 or the second game console 600-2) may include game console type information (eg, identifying the game console) Information about the manufacturer or game console type) and the game console serial number information. Further, the information identifying the game played in any of the various game consoles (eg, the first game console 600-1 or the second game console 600-2) may include game type information (eg, identifying the game name) News).

此處,遊戲環境資訊意謂玩每一遊戲所需的所有資訊。舉例而言,遊戲環境資訊可包括:外部遊戲環境資訊,諸如,遊戲音量資訊以及遊戲解析度資訊;以及內部遊戲環境資訊,諸如,化身設定資訊、遊戲中的化身位置資訊、遊戲中的化身等級資訊以及正在玩的遊戲的進度。 Here, the game environment information means all the information needed to play each game. For example, the game environment information may include: external game environment information, such as game volume information and game resolution information; and internal game environment information, such as avatar setting information, avatar position information in the game, avatar level in the game. Information and the progress of the game being played.

圖49為根據本發明的一例示性實施例的遊戲環境設定系統中所包括的使用者終端設備700的方塊圖。請參照圖49,使用者終端設備700包括通訊單元710、儲存單元720、顯示單元730以及控制單元740。 FIG. 49 is a block diagram of a user terminal device 700 included in a game environment setting system according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 49, the user terminal device 700 includes a communication unit 710, a storage unit 720, a display unit 730, and a control unit 740.

通訊單元710將使用者終端設備700連接至外部裝置。特定而言,當在第一遊戲控制台600-1與通訊單元710之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元710可接收關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。 The communication unit 710 connects the user terminal device 700 to an external device. In particular, when short-distance access is performed between the first game console 600-1 and the communication unit 710, the communication unit 710 can receive ID information about the first game console 600-1 and game environment information.

當在第二遊戲控制台600-2與通訊單元710之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元710可自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊。在此狀況下,控制單元740可自儲存單元720中所儲存的遊戲環境資訊偵測對應於關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊。接著,通訊單元710可將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2可將所接收的遊戲環境資訊設定為自身的遊戲環境資訊。 When short-distance access is performed between the second game console 600-2 and the communication unit 710, the communication unit 710 can receive ID information about the second game console 600-2 from the second game console 600-2. In this case, the control unit 740 can detect the game environment information corresponding to the ID information about the second game console 600-2 from the game environment information stored in the storage unit 720. Then, the communication unit 710 can transmit the detected game environment information to the second game console 600-2. In this case, the second game console 600-2 can set the received game environment information as its own game environment information.

另外,當在第二遊戲控制台600-2與通訊單元710之間執行短距離存取時,通訊單元710可將儲存單元720中所儲存的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。接著,第二遊戲控制台600-2可自接收自使用者終端設備700的ID資訊偵測匹配ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊,所述ID資訊與關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊相同。接著,第二遊戲控制台600-2可將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊設定為自身的遊戲環境資訊。 In addition, when short-distance access is performed between the second game console 600-2 and the communication unit 710, the communication unit 710 can transmit the ID information and the game environment information stored in the storage unit 720 to the second game console. 600-2. Next, the second game console 600-2 may detect game environment information matching the ID information from the ID information received from the user terminal device 700, the ID information being the same as the ID information about the second game console 600-2. . Next, the second game console 600-2 can set the detected game environment information as its own game environment information.

此處,通訊單元710可根據各種短距離無線通訊方法中的任一者而與第一遊戲控制台600-1及第二遊戲控制台600-2交換資訊。短距離無線通訊方法可為NFC。 Here, the communication unit 710 can exchange information with the first game console 600-1 and the second game console 600-2 according to any of various short-range wireless communication methods. The short-range wireless communication method can be NFC.

除短距離無線通訊方法之外,通訊單元710可藉由經由LAN、網際網路、USB埠或3G或4G行動電信網路而以有線/無線方式連接至外部裝置,來接收或傳輸資訊。 In addition to the short-range wireless communication method, the communication unit 710 can receive or transmit information by connecting to an external device in a wired/wireless manner via a LAN, an Internet, a USB port, or a 3G or 4G mobile telecommunication network.

儲存單元720儲存驅動使用者終端設備700所需的各種 程式及資料。特定而言,儲存單元720可儲存自第一遊戲控制台600-1接收的環境資訊,以使得環境資訊映射至關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊。舉例而言,儲存單元720可如表2所示而儲存環境資訊。 The storage unit 720 stores various types required to drive the user terminal device 700 Program and information. In particular, the storage unit 720 can store the environmental information received from the first game console 600-1 to cause the environmental information to be mapped to the ID information about the first game console 600-1. For example, the storage unit 720 can store environmental information as shown in Table 2.

儲存單元720可實現為:內建式儲存裝置,例如,RAM、快閃記憶體、ROM、EPROM、EEPROM、暫存器、硬碟、可卸除式磁碟以及記憶卡;或可附接/可拆卸儲存裝置,例如,USB記憶體以及CD-ROM。 The storage unit 720 can be implemented as: built-in storage device, such as RAM, flash memory, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, scratchpad, hard disk, removable disk and memory card; or attachable / Removable storage device, such as USB memory and CD-ROM.

顯示單元730顯示畫面影像。具體而言,當對第一遊戲控制台600-1執行短距離存取時,顯示單元730可顯示經由通訊單元710而接收的關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲 環境資訊。 The display unit 730 displays a screen image. Specifically, when performing short-distance access to the first game console 600-1, the display unit 730 may display ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game received via the communication unit 710. Environmental information.

在此狀況下,若在第一遊戲控制台600-1中玩遊戲時執行短距離存取,則所接收的遊戲環境資訊可為關於正在第一遊戲控制台600-1中玩的遊戲的遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,顯示單元720可顯示關於正在第一遊戲控制台600-1中玩的遊戲的遊戲環境資訊以及關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊。 In this case, if short-distance access is performed while playing a game in the first game console 600-1, the received game environment information may be a game regarding the game being played in the first game console 600-1. Environmental information. In this case, the display unit 720 can display game environment information about the game being played in the first game console 600-1 and ID information about the first game console 600-1.

若在第一遊戲控制台600-1中未玩遊戲時執行短距離存取,則所接收的遊戲環境資訊可為第一遊戲控制台600-1中所儲存的所有遊戲環境資訊或由使用者經由第一遊戲控制台600-1上的UI窗口自第一遊戲控制台600-1選擇的遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,顯示單元720可顯示第一遊戲控制台600-1中所儲存的所有遊戲環境資訊或自第一遊戲控制台600-1選擇的遊戲環境資訊,以及關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊。 If short-distance access is performed when the game is not played in the first game console 600-1, the received game environment information may be all game environment information stored in the first game console 600-1 or by the user. Game environment information selected from the first game console 600-1 via a UI window on the first game console 600-1. In this case, the display unit 720 can display all the game environment information stored in the first game console 600-1 or the game environment information selected from the first game console 600-1, and regarding the first game console 600. -1 ID information.

當在顯示單元730上顯示關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊時,使用者可經由各種UI中的任一者而自顯示單元730上所顯示的遊戲環境資訊選擇待儲存於使用者終端設備700中的遊戲環境資訊。 When the ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game environment information are displayed on the display unit 730, the user can select the game environment information displayed on the display unit 730 via any of the various UIs. Game environment information stored in the user terminal device 700.

當對第二遊戲控制台600-2執行短距離存取時,顯示單元730可顯示已儲存於儲存單元720中且將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,可依序顯示ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。舉例而言,在顯示單元730上,可僅顯示ID資訊,且在自ID資訊選擇特定ID資訊時,可顯示對應於所 選擇的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊。 When performing short-distance access to the second game console 600-2, the display unit 730 may display ID information and game environment information that have been stored in the storage unit 720 and that will be transmitted to the second game console 600-2. In this case, the ID information and the game environment information can be displayed in order. For example, on the display unit 730, only the ID information may be displayed, and when the specific ID information is selected from the ID information, the corresponding information may be displayed. Game environment information for selected ID information.

在此狀況下,使用者可經由各種UI中的任一者而自顯示單元730上所顯示的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊選擇將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。 In this case, the user can select the ID information and the game environment information to be transmitted to the second game console 600-2 from the ID information displayed on the display unit 730 and the game environment information via any of the various UIs. .

將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊可為由使用者經由第二遊戲控制台600-2所提供的UI而自第二遊戲控制台600-2選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2可產生用於接收所選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊的控制訊號,且可將控制訊號傳輸至使用者終端設備700。接著,使用者終端設備700可將對應於控制訊號的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。 The ID information and game environment information to be transmitted to the second game console 600-2 may be ID information selected from the second game console 600-2 by the user via the UI provided by the second game console 600-2. And game environment information. In this case, the second game console 600-2 may generate a control signal for receiving the selected ID information and the game environment information, and may transmit the control signal to the user terminal device 700. Next, the user terminal device 700 can transmit the ID information corresponding to the control signal and the game environment information to the second game console 600-2.

此外,當對第二遊戲控制台600-2執行短距離存取且經由通訊單元710而自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊時,顯示單元730可顯示對應於關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的所接收的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊。 Further, when the short distance access is performed to the second game console 600-2 and the ID information about the second game console 600-2 is received from the second game console 600-2 via the communication unit 710, the display unit 730 Game environment information corresponding to the received ID information regarding the second game console 600-2 may be displayed.

在此狀況下,使用者可經由各種UI中的任一者而自顯示單元730上所顯示的遊戲環境資訊選擇將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲環境資訊。 In this case, the user can select the game environment information to be transmitted to the second game console 600-2 from the game environment information displayed on the display unit 730 via any of the various UIs.

可使用各種使用者輸入感測設備(諸如,感測使用者的觸摸操縱的觸摸感測器、感測使用者的距離運動的距離感測器以及感測使用者的語音命令的麥克風)來實現各種UI。 Various user input sensing devices can be used, such as a touch sensor that senses a user's touch manipulation, a distance sensor that senses a user's distance motion, and a microphone that senses a user's voice command. Various UI.

顯示單元730可實現為以下各者中的至少一者:液晶顯 示器、TFT-LCD、OLED、可撓性顯示器、3D顯示器以及透明顯示器。 The display unit 730 can be implemented as at least one of the following: liquid crystal display Display, TFT-LCD, OLED, flexible display, 3D display and transparent display.

控制單元740控制使用者終端設備700的整體操作。具體而言,控制單元740可控制通訊單元710、儲存單元720以及顯示單元730中的至少一些。 The control unit 740 controls the overall operation of the user terminal device 700. In particular, the control unit 740 can control at least some of the communication unit 710, the storage unit 720, and the display unit 730.

特定而言,當藉由短距離存取第一遊戲控制台600-1而接收關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊時,控制單元740可控制顯示單元730顯示關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。此處,當在第一遊戲控制台600-1中玩遊戲時執行短距離存取時,遊戲環境資訊可為關於正在玩的遊戲的遊戲環境資訊。當在第一遊戲控制台600-1中未玩遊戲時執行短距離存取時,遊戲環境資訊可為第一遊戲控制台600-1中所儲存的所有遊戲環境資訊或由使用者自第一遊戲控制台600-1選擇的遊戲環境資訊。 In particular, when the ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game environment information are received by accessing the first game console 600-1 over a short distance, the control unit 740 can control the display unit 730 to display the ID information of a game console 600-1 and game environment information. Here, when short-distance access is performed while playing a game in the first game console 600-1, the game environment information may be game environment information about the game being played. When short-distance access is performed when the game is not played in the first game console 600-1, the game environment information may be all game environment information stored in the first game console 600-1 or first by the user. Game environment information selected by the game console 600-1.

此外,控制單元740可控制儲存單元720儲存根據UI而自顯示單元730上所顯示的遊戲環境資訊選擇的遊戲環境資訊,以使得所選擇的遊戲環境資訊匹配關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的所接收的ID資訊。舉例而言,控制單元740可控制儲存單元720以如表2所示而儲存遊戲環境資訊。 In addition, the control unit 740 can control the storage unit 720 to store game environment information selected from the game environment information displayed on the display unit 730 according to the UI, so that the selected game environment information matches the first game console 600-1. The ID information received. For example, the control unit 740 can control the storage unit 720 to store game environment information as shown in Table 2.

當對第二遊戲控制台600-2執行短距離存取且經由通訊單元710而自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊時,控制單元740可自儲存單元720中所儲存的 遊戲環境資訊偵測對應於關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的所接收的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,控制單元740可控制通訊單元710直接將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2,或控制顯示單元730顯示所偵測的遊戲環境資訊。若在顯示單元730上顯示所偵測的遊戲環境資訊,則控制單元740可控制通訊單元710將使用者自所顯示的遊戲環境資訊選擇的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。 When performing short-distance access to the second game console 600-2 and receiving ID information about the second game console 600-2 from the second game console 600-2 via the communication unit 710, the control unit 740 may Stored in storage unit 720 The game environment information detects game environment information corresponding to the received ID information about the second game console 600-2. In this case, the control unit 740 can control the communication unit 710 to directly transmit the detected game environment information to the second game console 600-2, or control the display unit 730 to display the detected game environment information. If the detected game environment information is displayed on the display unit 730, the control unit 740 can control the communication unit 710 to transmit the game environment information selected by the user from the displayed game environment information to the second game console 600-2.

為便於解釋,現將描述自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收的ID資訊包括遊戲控制台類型資訊(例如,遊戲控制台1)以及遊戲類型資訊(例如,遊戲1)的狀況。此處,在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取的時間點在第二遊戲控制台600-2中玩遊戲時接收的ID資訊可包括遊戲類型資訊。在此時間點在第二遊戲控制台600-2中未玩遊戲時接收的ID資訊可不包括遊戲類型資訊。 For convenience of explanation, the ID information received from the second game console 600-2 will now be described as including the status of the game console type information (for example, the game console 1) and the game type information (for example, the game 1). Here, the ID information received when the game is played in the second game console 600-2 at the time point when the short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2 may include the game type information. . The ID information received when the game is not played in the second game console 600-2 at this point of time may not include the game type information.

當自第二遊戲控制台600-2接收ID資訊時,控制單元740可偵測匹配遊戲控制台1以及遊戲1中的至少一者的遊戲環境資訊。接著,控制單元740可控制通訊單元710將匹配的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2,或控制顯示單元730顯示所偵測的遊戲環境資訊。 When receiving the ID information from the second game console 600-2, the control unit 740 may detect the game environment information that matches at least one of the game console 1 and the game 1. Next, the control unit 740 can control the communication unit 710 to transmit the matched game environment information to the second game console 600-2, or control the display unit 730 to display the detected game environment information.

此外,當對第二遊戲控制台600-2執行短距離存取時,控制單元740可控制通訊單元710將儲存單元720中所儲存的所有ID資訊以及所有遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2,或 可控制顯示單元730顯示儲存單元720中所儲存的所有ID資訊以及所有遊戲環境資訊。若在顯示單元730上顯示所有ID資訊以及所有遊戲環境資訊,則使用者可經由各種UI中的任一者而自所顯示的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊選擇將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2可自接收自使用者終端設備700的ID資訊偵測匹配ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊,所述ID資訊與關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊相同。 In addition, when performing short-distance access to the second game console 600-2, the control unit 740 can control the communication unit 710 to transmit all ID information stored in the storage unit 720 and all game environment information to the second game console. 600-2, or The controllable display unit 730 displays all ID information stored in the storage unit 720 and all game environment information. If all the ID information and all the game environment information are displayed on the display unit 730, the user can select from the displayed ID information and the game environment information to be transmitted to the second game console 600 via any of the various UIs. 2 ID information and game environment information. In this case, the second game console 600-2 may detect game environment information matching the ID information from the ID information received from the user terminal device 700, the ID information and the second game console 600-2. The ID information is the same.

為便於解釋,下文中將假設,自使用者終端設備700傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊如表2所示。 For convenience of explanation, it will be assumed hereinafter that the ID information and the game environment information transmitted from the user terminal device 700 to the second game console 600-2 are as shown in Table 2.

若在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取的時間點,關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲控制台類型資訊為「遊戲控制台1」且「遊戲1」正在第二遊戲控制台600-2中執行,則第二遊戲控制台600-2可偵測匹配「遊戲控制台1」以及「遊戲1」的外部遊戲資訊(遊戲音量:60%,解析度:HD)以及內部遊戲資訊1。 If the time point of short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the game console type information about the second game console 600-2 is "game console 1" and "Game 1" is being executed in the second game console 600-2, and the second game console 600-2 can detect external game information matching "Game Console 1" and "Game 1" (game volume: 60%) , resolution: HD) and internal game information 1.

若在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取的時間點,關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲控制台類型資訊為「遊戲控制台1」且無遊戲在第二遊戲控制台600-2中執行,則第二遊戲控制台600-2可根據遊戲來對匹配「遊戲控制台1」的所有外部遊戲資訊以及內部遊戲資訊進行分類以及偵 測。 If the time point of short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the game console type information about the second game console 600-2 is "game console 1" and If no game is executed in the second game console 600-2, the second game console 600-2 can classify and detect all external game information and internal game information matching the "game console 1" according to the game. Measurement.

將傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊可為由使用者經由第二遊戲控制台600-2所提供的UI而自第二遊戲控制台600-2選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊。在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2可產生用於接收所選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊的控制訊號,且將控制訊號傳輸至使用者終端設備700。控制單元740可偵測對應於控制訊號的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊,且將所述ID資訊以及所述遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。 The ID information and game environment information to be transmitted to the second game console 600-2 may be ID information selected from the second game console 600-2 by the user via the UI provided by the second game console 600-2. And game environment information. In this case, the second game console 600-2 may generate a control signal for receiving the selected ID information and the game environment information, and transmit the control signal to the user terminal device 700. The control unit 740 can detect the ID information corresponding to the control signal and the game environment information, and transmit the ID information and the game environment information to the second game console 600-2.

此外,控制單元740可改變使用者終端設備700中所儲存的遊戲環境資訊的格式。換句話說,若在關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊中,遊戲控制台類型資訊與儲存單元720中所儲存的遊戲控制台類型資訊不同,但遊戲類型資訊與儲存單元720中所儲存的遊戲類型資訊相同,則控制單元740可將所儲存的遊戲環境資訊的格式改變為可用於第二遊戲控制台600-2中的格式。 Further, the control unit 740 can change the format of the game environment information stored in the user terminal device 700. In other words, if the game console type information is different from the game console type information stored in the storage unit 720 in the ID information about the second game console 600-2, but the game type information and the storage unit 720 The stored game type information is the same, and the control unit 740 can change the format of the stored game environment information to a format usable in the second game console 600-2.

為便於解釋,將描述使用者終端設備700中所儲存的ID資訊中所包括的遊戲控制台類型資訊以及遊戲類型資訊分別為「遊戲控制台1」以及「遊戲1」且關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊中所包括的遊戲控制台類型資訊為「遊戲控制台2」的狀況。 For convenience of explanation, the game console type information and the game type information included in the ID information stored in the user terminal device 700 will be described as "game console 1" and "game 1", respectively, and regarding the second game console. The game console type information included in the ID information of 600-2 is the status of "Game Console 2".

在此狀況下,將應用於第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲環境資訊的格式可能不可用於第二遊戲控制台600-2,此是因為關於第 二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊中所包括的遊戲控制台類型資訊與使用者終端設備700中所儲存的ID資訊中所包括的遊戲控制台類型資訊的格式不同。因此,控制單元740可將應用於第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲環境資訊的格式改變為可用於第二遊戲控制台600-2的格式。 In this case, the format of the game environment information to be applied to the second game console 600-2 may not be available to the second game console 600-2, because The game console type information included in the ID information of the second game console 600-2 is different from the format of the game console type information included in the ID information stored in the user terminal device 700. Accordingly, the control unit 740 can change the format of the game environment information applied to the second game console 600-2 to a format usable for the second game console 600-2.

第二遊戲控制台600-2可基於所接收的遊戲環境資訊而設定自身的遊戲環境資訊。 The second game console 600-2 can set its own game environment information based on the received game environment information.

控制單元740可包括CPU、儲存控制程式的ROM以及經組態以記憶輸入資料或用作工作相關記憶體區域的RAM。CPU、ROM以及RAM可經由內部匯流排而連接。 Control unit 740 can include a CPU, a ROM that stores control programs, and a RAM configured to memorize input data or to serve as a work-related memory region. The CPU, ROM, and RAM can be connected via an internal bus bar.

圖50及圖51為說明根據本發明的實施例的設定遊戲環境資訊的方法的時序圖。 50 and 51 are timing diagrams illustrating a method of setting game environment information according to an embodiment of the present invention.

請參照圖50,當在第一遊戲控制台600-1與使用者終端設備700之間執行短距離存取時,第一遊戲控制台600-1將自身的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至使用者終端設備700(操作S5001)。 Referring to FIG. 50, when performing short-distance access between the first game console 600-1 and the user terminal device 700, the first game console 600-1 transmits its own ID information and game environment information to use. The terminal device 700 (operation S5001).

接著,在使用者終端設備700自第一遊戲控制台600-1接收關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊時,使用者終端設備700儲存所接收的遊戲環境資訊,以使得遊戲環境資訊匹配關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊(操作S5002)。 Next, when the user terminal device 700 receives the ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game environment information from the first game console 600-1, the user terminal device 700 stores the received game environment information, The game environment information is made to match the ID information about the first game console 600-1 (operation S5002).

接著,當在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取時,使用者終端設備700將其中所儲存的ID 資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2(操作S5003)。在此狀況下,使用者終端設備700將其中所儲存的所有ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2,將經由使用者終端設備700所提供的UI而選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2,或將經由第二遊戲控制台600-2所提供的UI而選擇的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2。 Next, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the user terminal device 700 will store the ID stored therein. The information and game environment information are transmitted to the second game console 600-2 (operation S5003). In this case, the user terminal device 700 transmits all the ID information and the game environment information stored therein to the second game console 600-2, and the ID information selected via the UI provided by the user terminal device 700 and The game environment information is transmitted to the second game console 600-2, or the ID information and the game environment information selected via the UI provided by the second game console 600-2 are transmitted to the second game console 600-2.

在此狀況下,第二遊戲控制台600-2自接收自使用者終端設備700的遊戲環境資訊偵測映射至關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊(操作S5004)。 In this case, the second game console 600-2 detects the game environment information from the game environment information received from the user terminal device 700 to the ID information about the second game console 600-2 (operation S5004).

接著,第二遊戲控制台600-2將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊設定為自身的遊戲環境資訊(操作S5005)。 Next, the second game console 600-2 sets the detected game environment information as its own game environment information (operation S5005).

可使用自使用者終端設備700接收或由第二遊戲控制台600-2偵測的遊戲環境資訊而設定第二遊戲控制台600-2的遊戲環境資訊。 The game environment information of the second game console 600-2 may be set using game environment information received from the user terminal device 700 or detected by the second game console 600-2.

請參照圖51,當在第一遊戲控制台600-1與使用者終端設備700之間執行短距離存取時,第一遊戲控制台600-1將自身的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊傳輸至使用者終端設備700(操作S5101)。 Referring to FIG. 51, when performing short-distance access between the first game console 600-1 and the user terminal device 700, the first game console 600-1 transmits its own ID information and game environment information to use. The terminal device 700 (operation S5101).

接著,在使用者終端設備700自第一遊戲控制台600-1接收關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊以及遊戲環境資訊時,使用者終端設備700儲存關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的所接收的 遊戲環境資訊,以使得遊戲環境資訊匹配關於第一遊戲控制台600-1的ID資訊(操作S5102)。 Next, when the user terminal device 700 receives the ID information about the first game console 600-1 and the game environment information from the first game console 600-1, the user terminal device 700 stores the first game console 600- Received by 1 The game environment information is such that the game environment information matches the ID information about the first game console 600-1 (operation S5102).

接著,當在使用者終端設備700與第二遊戲控制台600-2之間執行短距離存取時,第二遊戲控制台600-2將自身的ID資訊傳輸至使用者終端設備700(操作S5103)。 Next, when short-distance access is performed between the user terminal device 700 and the second game console 600-2, the second game console 600-2 transmits its own ID information to the user terminal device 700 (operation S5103). ).

接著,使用者終端設備700偵測匹配關於第二遊戲控制台600-2的ID資訊的遊戲環境資訊(操作S5104)。 Next, the user terminal device 700 detects game environment information that matches the ID information about the second game console 600-2 (operation S5104).

接著,使用者終端設備700經由短距離存取而將所偵測的遊戲環境資訊傳輸至第二遊戲控制台600-2(操作S5105)。 Next, the user terminal device 700 transmits the detected game environment information to the second game console 600-2 via short-distance access (operation S5105).

接著,第二遊戲控制台600-2將所接收的遊戲環境資訊設定為自身的遊戲環境資訊(操作S5106)。 Next, the second game console 600-2 sets the received game environment information as its own game environment information (operation S5106).

圖52為說明根據本發明的例示性實施例的操作汽車網域管理系統1040的方法的時序圖。 FIG. 52 is a timing diagram illustrating a method of operating an automotive domain management system 1040, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present invention.

請參照圖52,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S5201)。 Referring to FIG. 52, the user terminal device 200 transmits the authorization information and the user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S5201).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的關於使用者終端設備200的授權資訊是讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S5202)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 identifies that the authorization information about the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 is that the user terminal device 200 can access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S5202). ).

若鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1釋放自身的鎖定狀態(操作S5203)。接著,鎖定設備300-1將使用者ID資訊傳輸至管 理伺服器100(操作S5204)。 If the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the locking device 300-1 releases its own locked state (operation S5203). Next, the locking device 300-1 transmits the user ID information to the tube. The server 100 is operated (operation S5204).

接著,管理伺服器100提取對應於使用者ID資訊的設定資訊(操作S5205)。接著,管理伺服器100基於所提取的設定資訊而將用於控制至少一個裝置(例如,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n)的控制訊號傳輸至裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n(操作S5206)。 Next, the management server 100 extracts setting information corresponding to the user ID information (operation S5205). Next, the management server 100 will control the control signals for controlling at least one device (for example, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n) based on the extracted setting information. It is transmitted to the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n (operation S5206).

接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n基於設定資訊而操作(操作S5207)。 Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n operate based on the setting information (operation S5207).

接著,在裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n由使用者使用時,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n更新自身的設定資訊(操作S5208)。接著,裝置300-2、300-3、300-4、......、300-n將經更新的設定資訊傳輸至管理伺服器100(操作S5209)。 Next, when the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n are used by the user, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..... ., 300-n updates its own setting information (operation S5208). Next, the devices 300-2, 300-3, 300-4, ..., 300-n transmit the updated setting information to the management server 100 (operation S5209).

接著,使用者終端設備200藉由短距離存取鎖定設備300-1而將自身的授權資訊以及使用者ID資訊傳輸至鎖定設備300-1(操作S5210)。 Next, the user terminal device 200 transmits its own authorization information and user ID information to the locking device 300-1 by the short-distance access locking device 300-1 (operation S5210).

接著,鎖定設備300-1鑑別自使用者終端設備200接收的關於使用者終端設備200的授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域的授權資訊(操作S5211)。 Next, the locking device 300-1 authenticates the authorization information about the user terminal device 200 received from the user terminal device 200 to enable the user terminal device 200 to access the authorization information of the domain managed by the management server 100 (operation S5211). .

若鑑別授權資訊讓使用者終端設備200能夠存取由管理伺服器100管理的網域,則鎖定設備300-1設定自身的鎖定狀態(操作S5212)。接著,鎖定設備300-1向管理伺服器100通知鎖定狀態得以設定(操作S5213)。 If the authentication authorization information enables the user terminal device 200 to access the domain managed by the management server 100, the lock device 300-1 sets its own lock state (operation S5212). Next, the lock device 300-1 notifies the management server 100 that the lock state is set (operation S5213).

接著,管理伺服器100儲存經更新的設定資訊,使其映射至使用者ID資訊(操作S5214)。 Next, the management server 100 stores the updated setting information to map it to the user ID information (operation S5214).

根據上述例示性實施例的控制方法可實現為儲存於各種非暫時性電腦可讀媒介中的任一者中的程式碼,且經由各種非暫時性電腦可讀媒介中的任一者而提供至伺服器或裝置。 The control method according to the above exemplary embodiments may be implemented as a code stored in any of various non-transitory computer readable media and provided to any of a variety of non-transitory computer readable media to any one of Server or device.

不同於僅能夠短時間儲存資料的媒介(諸如,暫存器、快取記憶體以及記憶體),非暫時性電腦可讀媒介為能夠半永久性儲存資料且可由裝置讀取資料的媒介。詳細而言,如上所述的各種應用程式或程式可儲存於非暫時性電腦可讀媒介(例如,CD、數位多功能光碟(DVD)、硬碟、藍光光碟、USB、記憶卡或ROM)中,且經由所述非暫時性電腦可讀媒介來提供。 Unlike media that can only store data for short periods of time (such as scratchpads, cache memory, and memory), non-transitory computer readable media are media that can store data semi-permanently and can be read by the device. In detail, various applications or programs as described above may be stored in a non-transitory computer readable medium (for example, a CD, a digital versatile disc (DVD), a hard disc, a Blu-ray disc, a USB, a memory card, or a ROM). And provided via the non-transitory computer readable medium.

前述本發明的例示性實施例及優點僅為例示性的且不應解釋為限制性的。本發明的教示可容易應用於其他類型的設備。此外,本發明的例示性實施例的描述意欲為說明性的,且不限制申請專利範圍的範疇,且對於熟習此項技術者而言,不同的替代、修改及變化將為顯而易見的。 The foregoing illustrative embodiments and advantages of the invention are intended to be illustrative and not restrictive. The teachings of the present invention can be readily applied to other types of devices. In addition, the description of the exemplary embodiments of the present invention is intended to be illustrative, and is not intended to

100‧‧‧電子裝置 100‧‧‧Electronic devices

200‧‧‧使用者終端設備 200‧‧‧User terminal equipment

300-1‧‧‧鎖定設備 300-1‧‧‧Locking equipment

300-2~300-n‧‧‧裝置 300-2~300-n‧‧‧ device

S801‧‧‧操作 S801‧‧‧ operation

S802‧‧‧操作 S802‧‧‧ operation

S803‧‧‧操作 S803‧‧‧ operation

S804‧‧‧操作 S804‧‧‧ operation

S805‧‧‧操作 S805‧‧‧ operation

S806‧‧‧操作 S806‧‧‧ operation

Claims (15)

一種通用存取方法,所述方法包括:經由近場通訊(NFC)而自控制是否允許使用者進入至少一網域的安全存取點接收一訊號,所述訊號為向一行動裝置請求鑑別資訊的訊號;選擇對應於所述安全存取點的於多個鑑別資訊中的其中之一的所述鑑別資訊;以及經由NFC而將所述選擇的鑑別資訊傳送至所述安全存取點,其中所述行動裝置儲存對應至第一網域的第一鑑別資訊以及對應至第二網域的第二鑑別資訊。 A universal access method, the method comprising: controlling, by near field communication (NFC), whether to allow a user to enter a secure access point of at least one domain to receive a signal, the signal being a request for authentication information from a mobile device The identification information corresponding to one of the plurality of authentication information corresponding to the secure access point; and transmitting the selected authentication information to the secure access point via NFC, wherein The mobile device stores first authentication information corresponding to the first network domain and second authentication information corresponding to the second network domain. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述的通用存取方法,其中所述安全存取點包括與包含第一多個受控制裝置的第一網域相關聯的第一安全存取點以及與包含第二多個受控制裝置的第二網域相關聯的第二安全存取點中的其中之一者,其中所述選擇包括:判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點或與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點;若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一鑑別資訊;以及若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二鑑別資訊。 The universal access method of claim 1, wherein the secure access point comprises a first secure access point associated with a first network domain comprising a first plurality of controlled devices and One of a second secure access point associated with a second domain of the plurality of controlled devices, wherein said selecting comprises: determining that said secure access point corresponds to said first network domain The first secure access point or the second secure access point associated with the second network domain; if it is determined that the secure access point corresponds to the first network domain Selecting, by the first secure access point, the first authentication information; and selecting, if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain, selecting The second authentication information. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的通用存取方法,更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一多個受控制裝置的第一裝置設定資訊;若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二多個受控制裝置的第二裝置設定資訊;以及顯示圖形使用者介面,若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第一裝置設定資訊而控制所述第一多個受控制裝置,且若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第二裝置設定資訊而控制所述第二多個受控制裝置。 The universal access method of claim 2, further comprising: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, First device setting information of the first plurality of controlled devices; if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain, selecting the second plurality a second device setting information of the controlled device; and displaying a graphical user interface, wherein the graphic access is used if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain The interface is configured to control the first plurality of controlled devices based on the first device setting information, and if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure storage associated with the second domain Taking a point, the graphical user interface is configured to control the second plurality of controlled devices based on the second device setting information. 如申請專利範圍第3項所述的通用存取方法,其中所述第一裝置設定資訊包括所述第一多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第一組態,且其中所述第二裝置設定資訊包括所述第二多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第二組態。 The universal access method of claim 3, wherein the first device setting information comprises a first configuration of operation settings of the first plurality of controlled devices, and wherein the second device settings The information includes a second configuration of operational settings of the second plurality of controlled devices. 如申請專利範圍第4項所述的通用存取方法,更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則控制所述第一多個受控制裝置;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二 安全存取點,則控制所述第二多個受控制裝置。 The universal access method of claim 4, further comprising: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, controlling the a first plurality of controlled devices; and if the secure access point corresponds to the second associated with the second domain The secure access point controls the second plurality of controlled devices. 如申請專利範圍第5項所述的通用存取方法,更包括:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則接收所述第一多個受控制裝置的操作設定的經更新的組態的經更新的第一裝置設定資訊;若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則接收所述第二多個受控制裝置的操作設定的經更新的組態的經更新的第二裝置設定資訊;若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則更新所述第一裝置設定資訊;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則更新所述第二裝置設定資訊。 The universal access method of claim 5, further comprising: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, receiving the The updated configuration of the updated first device setting information of the first plurality of controlled devices; if the secure access point corresponds to the second security associated with the second domain An access point, receiving an updated configured updated second device setting information of an operation setting of the second plurality of controlled devices; if the secure access point corresponds to the first domain Associated with the first secure access point, updating the first device setting information; and if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain And updating the second device setting information. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述的通用存取方法,其中所述第一鑑別資訊包括與所述第一網域相關聯的第一安全金鑰資訊,且所述第二鑑別資訊包括與所述第二網域相關聯的第二安全金鑰資訊。 The universal access method of claim 2, wherein the first authentication information includes first security key information associated with the first domain, and the second authentication information includes The second security key information associated with the second domain. 如申請專利範圍第7項所述的通用存取方法,其中所述第一鑑別資訊更包括與所述第一網域相關聯的第一使用者識別碼,且其中所述第二鑑別資訊更包括與所述第二網域相關聯的第二使用者識別碼。 The universal access method of claim 7, wherein the first authentication information further includes a first user identifier associated with the first domain, and wherein the second authentication information is further A second user identification code associated with the second domain is included. 如申請專利範圍第8項所述的通用存取方法,其中所述第一網域位於第一位置處,且其中所述第二網域位於第二位置處。 The universal access method of claim 8, wherein the first domain is located at a first location, and wherein the second domain is located at a second location. 如申請專利範圍第8項所述的方法,其中所述第一網域是包括所述第一多個受控制裝置的第一網路,且其中所述第二網域是包括所述第二多個受控制裝置的第二網路。 The method of claim 8, wherein the first domain is a first network comprising the first plurality of controlled devices, and wherein the second domain is the second a second network of multiple controlled devices. 一種行動裝置,包括:記憶體,用以儲存對應於第一網域的第一鑑別資訊以及對應於第二網域的第二鑑別資訊;通訊單元,用以經由近場通訊(NFC)而自控制是否允許使用者進入至少一網域的安全存取點接收一訊號,所述訊號為向所述行動裝置請求鑑別資訊的訊號;以及處理器,用以選擇對應於所述安全存取點的多個鑑別資訊中的其中之一的所述鑑別資訊,且控制所述通訊單元經由NFC而將所述所選擇的鑑別資訊傳送至所述安全存取點,其中所述行動裝置儲存對應至第一網域的第一鑑別資訊以及對應至第二網域的第二鑑別資訊。 A mobile device includes: a memory for storing first authentication information corresponding to the first domain and second authentication information corresponding to the second domain; and a communication unit for self-near field communication (NFC) Controlling whether the user is allowed to enter the security access point of the at least one domain to receive a signal, wherein the signal is a signal for requesting the mobile device to identify the information; and a processor for selecting a corresponding security access point The authentication information of one of the plurality of authentication information, and controlling the communication unit to transmit the selected authentication information to the secure access point via NFC, wherein the mobile device stores a corresponding The first authentication information of a domain and the second authentication information corresponding to the second domain. 如申請專利範圍第11項所述的行動裝置,其中所述安全存取點包括與包含第一多個受控制裝置的第一網域相關聯的第一安全存取點以及與包含第二多個受控制裝置的第二網域相關聯的第二安全存取點中的其中之一者, 其中,所述處理器藉由以下方式來選擇對應於所述安全存取點的所述第一鑑別資訊以及所述第二鑑別資訊中的所述其中之一者:判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點或與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點;若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一鑑別資訊;以及若判定所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二鑑別資訊。 The mobile device of claim 11, wherein the secure access point comprises a first secure access point associated with a first network domain comprising a first plurality of controlled devices and a second plurality One of the second secure access points associated with the second domain of the controlled device, The processor selects one of the first authentication information and the second authentication information corresponding to the secure access point by: determining the secure access point by: Corresponding to the first secure access point associated with the first network domain or the second secure access point associated with the second network domain; if it is determined that the secure access point corresponds to Selecting, by the first secure access point associated with the first network domain, the first authentication information; and determining that the secure access point corresponds to a location associated with the second network domain The second secure access point is selected to select the second authentication information. 如申請專利範圍第12項所述的行動裝置,更包括顯示器,其中所述處理器:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則選擇所述第一多個受控制裝置的第一裝置設定資訊;若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則選擇所述第二多個受控制裝置的第二裝置設定資訊;以及顯示圖形使用者介面,若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第一裝置設定資訊而控制所述第一多個受控制裝置,且若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則所述圖形使用者介面用於基於所述第二裝置設定資訊 而控制所述第二多個受控制裝置。 The mobile device of claim 12, further comprising a display, wherein the processor: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain And selecting first device setting information of the first plurality of controlled devices; if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain, selecting a second device setting information of the second plurality of controlled devices; and displaying a graphical user interface, wherein the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain The graphical user interface is configured to control the first plurality of controlled devices based on the first device setting information, and if the secure access point corresponds to a location associated with the second domain The second secure access point, the graphical user interface is configured to set information based on the second device And controlling the second plurality of controlled devices. 如申請專利範圍第13項所述的行動裝置,其中所述第一裝置設定資訊包括所述第一多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第一組態,且其中所述第二裝置設定資訊包括所述第二多個受控制裝置的操作設定的第二組態。 The mobile device of claim 13, wherein the first device setting information comprises a first configuration of operation settings of the first plurality of controlled devices, and wherein the second device setting information comprises A second configuration of operation settings of the second plurality of controlled devices. 如申請專利範圍第14項所述的行動裝置,其中所述處理器:若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第一網域相關聯的所述第一安全存取點,則控制所述通訊單元將控制命令傳輸至所述第一多個受控制裝置;以及若所述安全存取點對應於與所述第二網域相關聯的所述第二安全存取點,則控制所述通訊單元將控制命令傳輸至所述第二多個受控制裝置。 The mobile device of claim 14, wherein the processor: if the secure access point corresponds to the first secure access point associated with the first domain, Transmitting a control command to the first plurality of controlled devices; and if the secure access point corresponds to the second secure access point associated with the second domain, The communication unit transmits a control command to the second plurality of controlled devices.
TW102112343A 2012-04-08 2013-04-08 Universal access method and mobile device TWI572201B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20120036464 2012-04-08
KR1020130004540A KR101960485B1 (en) 2012-04-08 2013-01-15 Management server and method for control device, user terminal apparatus and method for control device, user terminal apparatus and control method therof

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201351972A TW201351972A (en) 2013-12-16
TWI572201B true TWI572201B (en) 2017-02-21

Family

ID=49634282

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW102112343A TWI572201B (en) 2012-04-08 2013-04-08 Universal access method and mobile device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
KR (1) KR101960485B1 (en)
CN (1) CN104205902B (en)
TW (1) TWI572201B (en)

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102336293B1 (en) * 2014-12-19 2021-12-07 삼성전자 주식회사 Method and Device for controlling electronic device
US11436348B2 (en) 2017-03-07 2022-09-06 Sony Corporation Method and system of passing and applying delegations of authority
CN108376271B (en) * 2018-01-18 2020-12-01 南京信息工程大学 Workbench operation authority control system based on cloud platform
CN114764297A (en) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-19 青岛海尔洗衣机有限公司 Display method, device, storage medium and program product

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070118891A1 (en) * 2005-11-16 2007-05-24 Broadcom Corporation Universal authentication token
WO2009120481A2 (en) * 2008-03-27 2009-10-01 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatic near field communication application selection in an electronic device
TW201121257A (en) * 2009-12-11 2011-06-16 Toro Dev Ltd A mobile integrated distribution and transaction system and method for NFC services, and a mobile electronic device thereof
TW201204151A (en) * 2010-07-15 2012-01-16 Acer Inc Method for quickly establishing a wireless link

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6791467B1 (en) * 2000-03-23 2004-09-14 Flextronics Semiconductor, Inc. Adaptive remote controller
JP2004096294A (en) * 2002-08-30 2004-03-25 Sony Corp Electronic apparatus controller, electronic apparatus control system, and method for controlling electronic apparatus
JP4428055B2 (en) 2004-01-06 2010-03-10 ソニー株式会社 Data communication apparatus and memory management method for data communication apparatus
AU2007354267A1 (en) 2006-11-22 2008-12-04 John K. Bona Point0f sale transaction device with magnetic stripe emulator and biometric authentication
CN101674109A (en) * 2009-10-19 2010-03-17 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 NFC monitoring device, NFC communication terminal and monitoring system
FR2962571B1 (en) 2010-07-08 2012-08-17 Inside Contactless METHOD FOR PERFORMING A SECURE APPLICATION IN AN NFC DEVICE

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070118891A1 (en) * 2005-11-16 2007-05-24 Broadcom Corporation Universal authentication token
WO2009120481A2 (en) * 2008-03-27 2009-10-01 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatic near field communication application selection in an electronic device
TW201121257A (en) * 2009-12-11 2011-06-16 Toro Dev Ltd A mobile integrated distribution and transaction system and method for NFC services, and a mobile electronic device thereof
TW201204151A (en) * 2010-07-15 2012-01-16 Acer Inc Method for quickly establishing a wireless link

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20130113970A (en) 2013-10-16
CN104205902B (en) 2018-09-25
KR101960485B1 (en) 2019-03-20
CN104205902A (en) 2014-12-10
TW201351972A (en) 2013-12-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2648386B1 (en) Management Server and Method for Controlling Device, User Terminal Apparatus and Method for Controlling Device, and User Terminal Apparatus and Control Method Thereof
US11192522B2 (en) Method and device for sharing functions of smart key
US9462108B2 (en) Mobile terminal and method for controlling the mobile terminal
US10033544B2 (en) Notification apparatus and object position notification method thereof
KR102077233B1 (en) Method for providing content, mobile device and computer readable recording medium thereof
US9584955B2 (en) Method for processing data received and an electronic device thereof
AU2013203017B2 (en) Method and system for reproducing contents, and computer-readable recording medium thereof
US10667307B2 (en) Disambiguation of target devices using ambient signal data
US20140033298A1 (en) User terminal apparatus and control method thereof
CN106549977B (en) A kind of binding relationship methods, devices and systems for establishing account and equipment
CN104079565A (en) Authorization method and device
US20140059652A1 (en) Apparatus for uploading contents, user terminal apparatus for downloading contents, server, contents sharing system and their contents sharing method
TWI572201B (en) Universal access method and mobile device
CN104904158A (en) Method and system for controlling external device
KR102403061B1 (en) Card type device and payment method thereof
CN105722078A (en) Wifi access method and device
KR101850820B1 (en) Electronic Device and the Operating Method Thereof
AU2017202560B2 (en) Method and system for reproducing contents, and computer-readable recording medium thereof
KR102605469B1 (en) Contents management device and method for controlling the same
KR20110133952A (en) Mobile terminal and control method thereof